WO2022082685A1 - 通信方法及装置 - Google Patents

通信方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022082685A1
WO2022082685A1 PCT/CN2020/123017 CN2020123017W WO2022082685A1 WO 2022082685 A1 WO2022082685 A1 WO 2022082685A1 CN 2020123017 W CN2020123017 W CN 2020123017W WO 2022082685 A1 WO2022082685 A1 WO 2022082685A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
candidate
pscell
message
candidate pscell
base station
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/123017
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
胡星星
耿婷婷
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP20958267.5A priority Critical patent/EP4216605A4/en
Priority to CN202080102977.8A priority patent/CN115868203A/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2020/123017 priority patent/WO2022082685A1/zh
Publication of WO2022082685A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022082685A1/zh
Priority to US18/303,422 priority patent/US20230262539A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/34—Reselection control
    • H04W36/36—Reselection control by user or terminal equipment
    • H04W36/362—Conditional handover
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0061—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link of neighbour cell information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
  • DC can support two or more base stations to provide data transmission service for one terminal at the same time.
  • These base stations include a primary base station and one or more secondary base stations.
  • the main base station can establish a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection with the terminal, and can transmit RRC messages with the terminal, and the main base station can also establish a control plane connection with the core network.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the secondary base station may transmit a part of the RRC message with the terminal, where the part of the RRC message includes measurement configuration information or a measurement report for measuring the signal quality of the cell.
  • the terminal After the terminal establishes an RRC connection with the primary base station, it can perform a conditional PSCell addition (CPA) to establish a connection with the secondary base station. After the terminal is connected to both the primary base station and the secondary base station, it can also perform a conditional PSCell change (conditional PSCell change, CPC) to change the PSCell connected to the terminal.
  • CPC conditional PSCell change
  • the primary base station will determine the change condition of the candidate PSCell
  • the primary base station will also receive the configuration information of the candidate PSCell from the candidate secondary base station, and determine the change condition of the candidate PSCell and the configuration information of the candidate PSCell sent to the terminal. , the processing process is complicated.
  • the present application provides a communication method and device, which can simplify the processing process of the main base station, reduce the overhead of the main base station, and shorten the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: a primary base station sends a first message to a candidate secondary base station, where the first message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list of the first candidate primary secondary cell, and the first identification corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first identification is used to indicate the condition that the PSCell currently connected to the terminal is changed to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identification; the primary base station receives the second message from the candidate secondary base station, the first The second message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list; the primary base station sends a third message to the terminal, where the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell
  • the master base station does not need to store the relevant information in the first message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or each candidate PSCell).
  • the first identifier corresponding to the PSCell which saves the storage overhead of the primary base station.
  • the master base station also does not need to associate the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station and reduces the main base station.
  • the overhead of the base station shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list are selected and processed from the first candidate PSCell list, and after receiving the second message, the master base station includes all or part of the content in the second message in the third message If it is sent to the terminal in the system, the problem of inability to determine the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell will not occur.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier. Based on the above method, the condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier may be indicated by the measurement identifier and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the method further includes: the primary base station receives a fourth message from the source secondary base station, where the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the corresponding ID of each candidate PSCell.
  • the first identifier, the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station for the terminal.
  • the master base station does not need to store the relevant information in the fourth message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or the first candidate PSCell corresponding to each PSCell). identification), saving the storage overhead of the main base station.
  • the master base station also does not need to associate the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station and reduces the main base station.
  • the overhead of the base station shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list are selected and processed from the first candidate PSCell list, and after receiving the second message, the master base station includes all or part of the content in the second message in the third message If it is sent to the terminal in the middle of the system, there will be no problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell or the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the third message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the terminal can determine that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the active secondary base station.
  • the terminal may determine the measurement object configuration according to the measurement identifier and the correspondence between the measurement identifier and the measurement object configuration determined by the source secondary base station, and according to the measurement identifier and the measurement identifier determined by the source secondary base station The correspondence between the measurement identifier and the measurement reporting configuration The relationship determines the measurement reporting configuration.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the primary base station for the terminal, and the first identifier is determined by the primary base station. Based on the above method, when the primary base station triggers the change of the PSCell, at least one candidate PSCell and the first identifier may be configured for the terminal.
  • the third message further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station.
  • the terminal can determine that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station.
  • the terminal can determine the measurement object configuration according to the measurement identifier and the corresponding relationship between the measurement identifier determined by the main base station and the measurement object configuration, and the measurement identifier and the corresponding relationship between the measurement identifier determined by the main base station and the measurement reporting configuration. Determine the measurement reporting configuration.
  • the method further includes: the master base station receives a fifth message from the terminal, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the master base station that the terminal has received the third message; the master base station according to the first Five messages send a sixth message to the first secondary base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the third message, and the first secondary base station includes at least one secondary base station among the source secondary base station and the candidate secondary base station.
  • the primary base station may receive a fifth message from the terminal, where the fifth message does not include a message sent by the terminal to the first secondary base station.
  • the primary base station may send the sixth message to the first secondary base station according to the fifth message, so that the first secondary base station determines that the terminal receives the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: a candidate secondary base station receives a first message from a primary base station, where the first message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list of the first candidate primary secondary cell , and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first identifier is used to indicate the condition that the PSCell currently connected to the terminal is changed to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier; the candidate secondary base station sends the first message to the primary base station according to the first message.
  • the second message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first candidate PSCell list includes the Two candidate PSCell lists.
  • the candidate secondary base station may select a candidate PSCell (ie, a candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list) from the first candidate PSCell list, and report to the primary The base station sends the second message.
  • the master base station does not need to store relevant information in the first message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell), saving The storage overhead of the main base station is reduced.
  • the master base station also does not need to associate the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station and reduces the main base station.
  • the overhead of the base station shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list are selected and processed from the first candidate PSCell list, and after receiving the second message, the master base station includes all or part of the content in the second message in the third message If it is sent to the terminal in the system, the problem of inability to determine the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell will not occur.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier. Based on the above method, the condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier may be indicated by the measurement identifier and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the method further includes: the candidate secondary base station receives a sixth message from the primary base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the primary base station to the primary base station.
  • the message of the terminal, the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the candidate secondary base station may determine that the terminal has received the third message according to the sixth message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: the source secondary base station determines a fourth message, where the fourth message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list of the first candidate primary and secondary cells, and each The first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station for the terminal, and the first identifier is used to indicate that the PSCell currently connected to the terminal is changed to the one corresponding to the first identifier The condition of the candidate PSCell; the source secondary base station sends the fourth message to the primary base station.
  • the source secondary base station when it determines that the trigger condition PSCell is changed, it may send a fourth message to the primary base station, so that the primary base station sends the first message to the candidate secondary base station according to the fourth message.
  • the candidate secondary base station may select a candidate PSCell (ie, a candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list) from the first candidate PSCell list, and send the second message to the primary base station.
  • the primary base station does not need to store the relevant information in the fourth message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell), saving Storage overhead of the primary base station.
  • the master base station also does not need to associate the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station and reduces the main base station.
  • the overhead of the base station shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list are selected and processed from the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the master base station After receiving the second message, the master base station includes all or part of the second message in the third message and sends it to For the terminal, there will be no problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier. Based on the above method, the condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier may be indicated by the measurement identifier and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the fourth message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the primary base station can determine that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the method further includes: the source secondary base station receives a sixth message from the primary base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the primary base station to The message of the terminal, the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first candidate PSCell The list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the source secondary base station may determine that the terminal receives the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: a terminal receiving a third message from a primary base station, where the third message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list of the second candidate primary and secondary cells, each The first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first indication information, wherein the candidate PSCells included in the second candidate PSCell list are all included in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station or the primary base station for the terminal.
  • the first identifier is used to indicate the condition that the PSCell currently connected to the terminal is the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier.
  • the base station is the secondary base station currently establishing a connection with the terminal, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station, or used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station; Three messages carry out conditional PSCell change.
  • the terminal can determine whether the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station or the source secondary base station according to the third message, and then can perform the conditional PSCell change according to the third message.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier. Based on the above method, the condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier may be indicated by the measurement identifier and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the method further includes: the terminal sends a fifth message to the primary base station, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the primary base station that the terminal receives the third message.
  • the master base station can determine that the terminal has received the third message, and then the master base station can send a sixth message to the first secondary base station according to the third message, which is used to indicate that the terminal has received the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a transceiver module; a transceiver module, configured to send a first message to a candidate secondary base station, where the first message includes each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list , and the first identification corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first identification is used to indicate the condition that the PSCell currently connected to the terminal is changed to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identification; the transceiver module is also used to receive information from the candidate secondary The second message of the base station.
  • the second message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first candidate PSCell The list includes the second candidate PSCell list; the transceiver module is further configured to send a third message to the terminal, where the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell , and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a fourth message from the source secondary base station, where the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first candidate PSCell corresponding to each PSCell.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station for the terminal.
  • the third message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the communication apparatus for the terminal, and the first identifier is determined by the communication apparatus.
  • the third message further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a fifth message from the terminal, and the fifth message is used to indicate to the communication device that the terminal has received the third message; the transceiver module is further configured to receive the third message according to the fifth message.
  • the message sends a sixth message to the first secondary base station, where the sixth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives the third message, and the first secondary base station includes at least one secondary base station among the source secondary base station and the candidate secondary base station.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a transceiver module; a transceiver module for receiving a first message from a primary base station, where the first message includes each candidate in the first candidate PSCell list The identifier of the PSCell, and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first identifier is used to indicate the condition that the PSCell currently connected to the terminal is changed to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier; A message sends a second message to the primary base station, where the second message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell , the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a sixth message from the autonomous base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the primary base station to the terminal
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a processing module and a transceiver module; the processing module is configured to determine a fourth message, where the fourth message includes each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and the corresponding first identifier of each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the communication device for the terminal, and the first identifier is used to indicate that the PSCell currently connected to the terminal is changed to this The first identifier corresponds to the condition of the candidate PSCell; the transceiver module is configured to send the fourth message to the primary base station.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the fourth message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a sixth message from the main base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the main base station to the terminal
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first candidate PSCell list includes The second candidate PSCell list.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a transceiver module and a processing module; the transceiver module is configured to receive a third message from a master base station, where the third message includes a second candidate PSCell list The identifier of each candidate PSCell, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first indication information, wherein the candidate PSCells included in the second candidate PSCell list are included in the first In the candidate PSCell list, the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station or the primary base station for the communication device, and the first identifier is used to indicate that the PSCell currently connected to the communication device is the first identifier The condition of the corresponding candidate PSCell, the source secondary base station is the secondary base station currently establishing a connection with the communication device, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a fifth message to the master base station, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the master base station that the communication apparatus has received the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or the instruction is executed by the processor , so that the device implements the method described in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , so that the device implements the method described in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the device is made to implement the method described in the third aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the device is made to implement the method described in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable medium on which computer programs or instructions are stored, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, cause a computer to execute the first aspect or any one of the first aspects. methods described in possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the second aspect or any one of the second aspect. methods described in possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the third aspect or any one of the third aspect methods described in possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the fourth aspect or any one of the fourth aspect. methods described in possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect or any of the possible aspects of the first aspect. Implement the method described in the method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on a computer, enables the computer to execute the second aspect or any of the possibilities of the second aspect. Implement the method described in the method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on a computer, enables the computer to execute the third aspect or any of the possible third aspects. Implement the method described in the method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on a computer, enables the computer to execute the fourth aspect or any of the possible aspects of the fourth aspect. Implement the method described in the method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor At the time, the chip is made to implement the method described in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store programs or instructions, and when the programs or instructions are executed by the processor At the time, the chip is made to implement the method described in the second aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the chip is made to implement the method described in the third aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor At the time, the chip is made to implement the method described in the fourth aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system.
  • the system includes the device described in the fifth aspect, and/or the device described in the sixth aspect, and/or the device described in the seventh aspect, and/or the device described in the eighth aspect; or the The system includes the device according to the ninth aspect, and/or the device according to the tenth aspect, and/or the device according to the eleventh aspect, and/or the device according to the twelfth aspect.
  • any of the communication devices, chips, computer-readable media, computer program products or communication systems provided above are all used to execute the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can be achieved. Referring to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, details are not repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: a primary base station sends a first message to a candidate secondary base station, where the first message includes the information of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list of the first candidate primary secondary cell an identifier and a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell; the primary base station receives a second message from the candidate secondary base station, the second message includes first information, and the first information includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, The measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list; A third message is sent, the third message including the first information.
  • the main base station does not need to store the relevant information in the first message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or, each candidate PSCell corresponds to measurement identification), saving the storage overhead of the main base station.
  • the master base station After receiving the second message, the master base station does not perceive the second message, but includes the first information in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal, without needing to use the information of the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the identifier associates the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station, reduces the overhead of the master base station, and shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the master base station does not have the problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the method further includes: the primary base station receives a fourth message from the source secondary base station, where the fourth message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell , the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station for the terminal.
  • the master base station does not need to store the relevant information in the fourth message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell), saving The storage overhead of the main base station is reduced.
  • the master base station After receiving the second message, the master base station does not perceive the second message, but includes the first information in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal, without needing to use the information of the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the identifier associates the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station, reduces the overhead of the master base station, and shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the master base station does not have the problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the first message also includes the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list
  • the fourth message also includes the first candidate PSCell list corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • Conditional reconfiguration flag Based on the above method, the first message and the fourth message may also carry a conditional reconfiguration identifier, so as to subsequently modify the change condition corresponding to the candidate PSCell and/or the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the third message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the terminal can determine that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the active secondary base station.
  • the terminal may determine the measurement object configuration according to the measurement identifier and the correspondence between the measurement identifier and the measurement object configuration determined by the source secondary base station, and according to the measurement identifier and the measurement identifier determined by the source secondary base station The correspondence between the measurement identifier and the measurement reporting configuration The relationship determines the measurement reporting configuration.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the primary base station for the terminal, and the measurement identifier is determined by the primary base station. Based on the above method, when the primary base station triggers the change of the PSCell, at least one candidate PSCell and a measurement identifier can be configured for the terminal.
  • the third message further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station.
  • the terminal can determine that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station.
  • the terminal can determine the measurement object configuration according to the measurement identifier and the corresponding relationship between the measurement identifier determined by the main base station and the measurement object configuration, and the measurement identifier and the corresponding relationship between the measurement identifier determined by the main base station and the measurement reporting configuration. Determine the measurement reporting configuration.
  • the method further includes: the master base station receives a fifth message from the terminal, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the master base station that the terminal has received the third message; the master base station sends the first message to the first base station according to the fifth message.
  • the secondary base station sends a sixth message, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the third message, and the first secondary base station includes at least one secondary base station among the source secondary base station and the candidate secondary base station.
  • the primary base station may receive a fifth message from the terminal, where the fifth message does not include a message sent by the terminal to the first secondary base station.
  • the primary base station may send the sixth message to the first secondary base station according to the fifth message, so that the first secondary base station determines that the terminal receives the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: a candidate secondary base station receives a first message from a primary base station, where the first message includes each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list of the first candidate primary secondary cell and the corresponding measurement identifier of each candidate PSCell; the candidate secondary base station sends a second message to the primary base station according to the first message, the second message includes the first information, and the first information includes each of the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the identifier of the candidate PSCell, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list .
  • the candidate secondary base station may select a candidate PSCell (that is, a candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list) from the first candidate PSCell list, and A second message is sent to the primary base station.
  • the master base station does not need to store the relevant information in the first message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell) , saving the storage overhead of the main base station.
  • the master base station After receiving the second message, the master base station does not perceive the second message, but includes the first information in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal, without needing to use the information of the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the identifier associates the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station, reduces the overhead of the master base station, and shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the master base station does not have the problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the first message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list. Based on the above method, the first message may also carry a conditional reconfiguration identifier, so as to subsequently modify the change condition corresponding to the candidate PSCell and/or the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the method further includes: the candidate secondary base station receives a sixth message from the primary base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the primary base station to the primary base station.
  • the message of the terminal, the third message includes the first information.
  • the candidate secondary base station may determine that the terminal has received the third message according to the sixth message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method.
  • the method includes: the source secondary base station determines a fourth message, where the fourth message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate primary and secondary cell PSCell list, and The measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station for the terminal; the source secondary base station sends the fourth message to the primary base station.
  • the source secondary base station when it determines that the trigger condition PSCell is changed, it may send a fourth message to the primary base station, so that the primary base station sends the first message to the candidate secondary base station according to the fourth message.
  • the candidate secondary base station may select a candidate PSCell (ie, a candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list) from the first candidate PSCell list, and send the second message to the primary base station.
  • the master base station does not need to store the relevant information in the fourth message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and/or the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell) , saving the storage overhead of the main base station.
  • the master base station After receiving the second message, the master base station does not perceive the second message, but includes the first information in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal, without needing to use the information of the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the identifier associates the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell, which simplifies the processing process of the master base station, reduces the overhead of the master base station, and shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the master base station does not have the problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the fourth message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list. Based on the above method, the conditional reconfiguration identifier may also be carried in the fourth message, so as to subsequently modify the change condition corresponding to the candidate PSCell and/or the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the fourth message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the primary base station can determine that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the method further includes: the source secondary base station receives a sixth message from the primary base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the primary base station to the primary base station.
  • the source secondary base station may determine that the terminal receives the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: a terminal receives a third message from a primary base station, where the third message includes first information, and the first information includes a second candidate primary and secondary cell The identifier of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first indication information, where the No.
  • the candidate PSCells included in the two candidate PSCell lists are all included in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station or the primary base station for the terminal, and the source secondary base station is the current
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station, or used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station; the terminal performs the conditional PSCell according to the third message. change.
  • the terminal can determine whether the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the primary base station or the source secondary base station according to the third message, and then can perform the conditional PSCell change according to the third message.
  • the method further includes: the terminal sends a fifth message to the primary base station, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the primary base station that the terminal receives the third message.
  • the master base station can determine that the terminal has received the third message, and then the master base station can send a sixth message to the first secondary base station according to the third message, which is used to indicate that the terminal has received the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a transceiver module; a transceiver module, configured to send a first message to a candidate secondary base station, where the first message includes each of the first candidate PSCell list The identifier of the candidate PSCell and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell; the transceiver module is configured to receive a second message from the candidate secondary base station, where the second message includes first information, and the first information includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a fourth message from the source secondary base station, where the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and the measurement corresponding to each candidate PSCell identifier, the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source secondary base station for the terminal.
  • the first message also includes the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list
  • the fourth message also includes the first candidate PSCell list corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • Conditional reconfiguration flag
  • the third message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the communication apparatus for the terminal, and the measurement identifier is determined by the communication apparatus.
  • the third message further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a fifth message from the terminal, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the communication device that the terminal has received the third message; the transceiver module is further configured to receive the third message according to the The fifth message sends a sixth message to the first secondary base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the third message, and the first secondary base station includes at least one secondary base station among the source secondary base station and the candidate secondary base station.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a transceiver module; a transceiver module, configured to receive a first message from a primary base station, where the first message includes each item in the first candidate PSCell list The identifiers of the candidate PSCells and the measurement identifiers corresponding to each candidate PSCell; the transceiver module is further configured to send a second message to the primary base station according to the first message, where the second message includes first information, and the first information includes the first message.
  • the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list include the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the first message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a sixth message from the autonomous base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the primary base station to the terminal message, the third message includes the first information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a processing module and a transceiver module; the processing module is configured to determine a fourth message, where the fourth message includes each of the first candidate PSCell list The identifier of the candidate PSCell and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the communication device for the terminal; the transceiver module is used to send the fourth message to the primary base station.
  • the fourth message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the fourth message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a sixth message from the main base station, where the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive a third message, and the third message is sent by the main base station to the terminal
  • the third message includes first information, the first information includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and Radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a transceiver module and a processing module; the transceiver module is configured to receive a third message from a master base station, where the third message includes the first information,
  • the first information includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list of the second candidate primary and secondary cells, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the candidate PSCells included in the second candidate PSCell list are all included in the first candidate PSCell list
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least the source secondary base station or the primary base station configured for the communication device.
  • a candidate PSCell, the source secondary base station is the secondary base station currently establishing a connection with the communication device
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source secondary base station, or used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is caused by the Triggered by the master base station
  • the processing module is configured to perform conditional PSCell change according to the third message.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a fifth message to the master base station, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the master base station that the communication apparatus has received the third message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor When executed, the apparatus is made to implement the method described in the twenty-sixth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-sixth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor When executed, the apparatus is made to implement the method described in the twenty-seventh aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-seventh aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor When executed, the apparatus is made to implement the method described in the twenty-eighth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-eighth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor When executed, the apparatus is made to implement the method described in the twenty-ninth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-ninth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the foregoing twenty-sixth aspect or the twentieth aspect The method described in any possible implementation manner of the six aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the foregoing twenty-seventh aspect or the twentieth aspect The method described in any possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the above-mentioned twenty-eighth aspect or twenty-eighth aspect A method as described in any possible implementation of the aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the above-mentioned twenty-ninth aspect or the twentieth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned twenty-sixth aspect or the twenty-sixth aspect The method described in any of the possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned twenty-seventh aspect or the twenty-seventh aspect The method described in any of the possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned twenty-eighth aspect or the twenty-eighth aspect The method described in any of the possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned twenty-ninth aspect or the twenty-ninth aspect The method described in any of the possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor At the time, the chip is made to implement the method described in the twenty-sixth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-sixth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the chip is made to implement the method described in the twenty-seventh aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-seventh aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the chip is made to implement the method described in the twenty-eighth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-eighth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the chip is made to implement the method described in the twenty-ninth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the twenty-ninth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system.
  • the system includes the device according to the thirtieth aspect, and/or the device according to the thirty-first aspect, and/or the device according to the thirty-second aspect, and/or the thirty-third aspect.
  • the device described above; or the system includes the device described in the above thirty-fourth aspect, and/or the device described in the above thirty-fifth aspect, and/or the device described in the above thirty-sixth aspect, and/or Or the device described in the thirty-seventh aspect above.
  • any of the communication devices, chips, computer-readable media, computer program products or communication systems provided above are all used to execute the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can be achieved. Referring to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, details are not repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method is applied to the case where the primary base station triggers the addition/change of the primary and secondary cells PSCell, or the method is applied to the source secondary base station to trigger the condition between the secondary base stations
  • the method includes: the primary base station sends a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate the addition/change conditions and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list; the primary base station receives the first message from the terminal. Two messages, the second message is used to indicate to the primary base station that the terminal has received the first message; the primary base station sends a third message to the first secondary base station according to the second message, and the third message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the first message information.
  • the master base station may send the third message to the first SN according to the second message, So that the first SN determines that the terminal has received the first message.
  • the first secondary base station when the first message is used to indicate the addition conditions and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the first secondary base station is a candidate secondary base station determined by the primary base station for the terminal. At least one, when the first message is used to indicate the change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the first secondary base station is the primary base station or the source secondary base station is a candidate secondary base station determined by the terminal for the terminal, and At least one of the source secondary base stations, where the source secondary base station is a secondary base station currently establishing a connection with the terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method is applied to the case where the primary base station triggers the addition/change of the primary and secondary cells PSCell, or the method is applied to the condition between the source secondary base station triggering the secondary base station and the secondary base station.
  • the method includes: the terminal receives a first message from the master base station, where the first message is used to indicate the addition/change conditions and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list; the terminal sends a second message to the master base station. message, the second message is used to indicate to the primary base station that the terminal receives the first message.
  • the terminal may send a second message to the master base station for indicating to the master base station that the terminal has received the first message, so that the master base station determines that the terminal has received the first message. message, and then the primary base station can indicate to the first secondary base station that the terminal receives the first message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method is applied to the case where the primary base station triggers the addition/change of the primary and secondary cells PSCell, or the method is applied to the condition between the source secondary base station triggering the secondary base station and the secondary base station.
  • the method includes: the first secondary base station receives a third message from the primary base station, the third message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the first message, and the first message is used to indicate each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list
  • the addition/change conditions and radio resource configuration of the third message are determined by the master base station according to the second message sent by the terminal, and the second message is used to indicate to the master base station that the terminal has received the first message;
  • a secondary base station determines that the terminal has received the first message according to the third message.
  • the first secondary base station may determine that the terminal has received the first message.
  • the first secondary base station when the first message is used to indicate the addition conditions and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, is at least one of the candidate secondary base stations determined by the primary base station for the terminal.
  • the first secondary base station is the primary base station or the source secondary base station.
  • the candidate secondary base station and the source secondary base station determined for the terminal At least one of the base stations, the source secondary base station is the secondary base station currently establishing a connection with the terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device is applied in the case where the communication device triggers the addition/change of the primary and secondary cells PSCell, or the communication device is used in the source secondary base station triggering between the secondary base stations.
  • the communication device When the condition of the PSCell is changed, the communication device includes: a transceiver module; the transceiver module is used to send a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate the addition/change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list
  • the transceiver module is also used to receive a second message from the terminal, and the second message is used to indicate to the communication device that the terminal has received the first message; the transceiver module is also used to send to the first secondary base station according to the second message.
  • the third message is used to indicate that the terminal receives the first message.
  • the first secondary base station when the first message is used to indicate the addition condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the first secondary base station is the candidate secondary base station determined by the communication device for the terminal. At least one, when the first message is used to indicate the change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the first secondary base station is a candidate secondary base station determined by the communication device or the source secondary base station for the terminal, and At least one of the source secondary base stations, where the source secondary base station is a secondary base station currently establishing a connection with the terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, and the communication device is applied in the case where the primary base station triggers the addition/change of the primary and secondary cells PSCell, or the communication device is applied when the source secondary base station triggers the interaction between the secondary base stations.
  • the communication device When the condition of the PSCell is changed, the communication device includes: a transceiver module; the transceiver module is used to receive a first message from the main base station, where the first message is used to indicate the addition/change conditions and wireless conditions of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list Resource configuration; a transceiver module, further configured to send a second message to the master base station, where the second message is used to indicate to the master base station that the communication device receives the first message.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, and the communication device is applied to the case where the primary base station triggers the addition/change of the primary and secondary cells PSCell, or the communication device is applied to the source secondary base station to trigger between the secondary base stations.
  • the communication device When the condition of the PSCell is changed, the communication device includes: a transceiver module and a processing module; the transceiver module is used to receive a third message from the main base station, and the third message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the first message, the first message Used to indicate the addition/change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list, the third message is determined by the main base station according to the second message sent by the terminal, and the second message is used to indicate to the main base station.
  • the terminal receives the first message; the processing module is configured to determine that the terminal has received the first message according to the third message.
  • the communication device when the first message is used to indicate the addition condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the communication device is at least one of the candidate secondary base stations determined by the primary base station for the terminal, When the first message is used to indicate the change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the communication apparatus determines at least one of the candidate secondary base stations and the source secondary base station determined for the terminal by the primary base station or the source secondary base station. One, the source secondary base station is the secondary base station that is currently establishing a connection with the terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor When executed, the apparatus is made to implement the method described in the fifty-first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fifty-first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor When executed, the apparatus is made to implement the method described in the fifty-second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fifty-second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor When executed, the apparatus is made to implement the method described in the fifty-third aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fifty-third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the above-mentioned fifty-first aspect or fifty-first aspect A method as described in any possible implementation of the aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the fifty-second aspect or the fifty-second aspect above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, causes a computer to execute the above-mentioned fifty-third aspect or fifty-third aspect The method described in any possible implementation manner of the three aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned fifty-first aspect or the fifty-first aspect The method described in any of the possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned fifty-second aspect or the fifty-second aspect The method described in any of the possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned fifty-third aspect or the fifty-third aspect The method described in any of the possible implementations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor At the time, the chip is made to implement the method described in the fifty-first aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the fifty-first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the chip is made to implement the method described in the fifty-second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fifty-second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, including: a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor , the chip is made to implement the method described in the above fifty-third aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fifty-third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system.
  • the system includes the device described in the fifty-fourth aspect above, and/or the device described in the fifty-fifth aspect, and/or the device described in the fifty-sixth aspect; or the system includes the above-mentioned fiftieth aspect
  • the device of the seventh aspect, and/or the device of the fifty-eighth aspect, and/or the device of the fifty-ninth aspect includes the above-mentioned fiftieth aspect.
  • any of the communication devices, chips, computer-readable media, computer program products or communication systems provided above can be used to execute the corresponding methods provided above, and therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved.
  • the beneficial effects in the corresponding method can be referred to, and details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • 3 to 5 are schematic flowcharts of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6 to 12 are schematic structural diagrams of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 13 to 14 are schematic diagrams of the composition of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application can be used in various multi-radio (or multi-air interface) dual-connectivity (multiple radio dual connectivity, MR-DC) architectures.
  • MR-DC multiple radio dual connectivity
  • the dual connection between the fourth generation (4G) communication system and the fifth generation (5G) communication system the dual connection between the 5G communication system and the 4G communication system, or the dual connection between the 5G communication system and the 5G communication system connection
  • future evolving communication systems such as the dual connection of the 6G communication system and other systems, or the dual connection of two 6G systems, etc.
  • the dual connection between the 4G communication system and the 5G communication system may include: dual connection (E-UTRA) of an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) system and a new radio (NR) system -NR dual connectivity, EN-DC), and dual connectivity of E-UTRA system and NR system under 5G core network (NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity, NGEN-DC), etc.
  • EN-DC can also be called option 3 series.
  • EN-DC is based on a long term evolution (LTE) base station, such as an eNB, as the master node (master node, MN) or primary base station, and an NR base station, such as gNB, as a secondary node (secondary node, SN) or secondary node
  • LTE long term evolution
  • MN and SN can respectively have data plane connection with evolved packet core (evolved packet core, EPC) network (ie, 4G core network) to provide air interface transmission resources for data between terminal and EPC.
  • EPC evolved packet core
  • 4G core network 4G core network
  • NGEN-DC is a DC of an LTE base station, such as ng-eNB, as MN, and an NR base station, such as gNB, as SN.
  • LTE base station such as ng-eNB
  • gNB NR base station
  • both MN and SN are connected to the 5G core network (5G core network, 5GC) to provide air interface transmission resources for data between the terminal and 5GC.
  • 5G core network 5G core network
  • the dual connection between the 5G communication system and the 4G communication system may include the dual connection (NR-E-UTRA dual connectivity, NE-DC) of the NR system and the E-UTRA system.
  • NE-DC can also be called option 4 series.
  • NE-DC is based on NR base station, such as gNB, as MN, and LTE base station, such as ng-eNB, as SN, and MN and SN can have data plane connection with 5GC respectively, providing air interface transmission for data between terminal and 5GC resource.
  • the dual connection of the 5G communication system and the 5G communication system may include the DC of the NR system and the NR system.
  • both MN and SN are NR base stations.
  • FIG. 1 it is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system 10 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 10 may include a network device 101, a network device 102, a network device 105, a terminal 103, and a terminal 104.
  • FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram, and does not constitute a limitation on the applicable scenarios of the technical solutions provided in the present application.
  • the network device in FIG. 1 may be any device with a wireless transceiver function. Including but not limited to: evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in LTE, base station (gNodeB or gNB) or transceiver point (transmission receiving point/transmission receiving point, TRP) in NR, 3GPP subsequent evolution, etc.
  • the base station can be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small base station, a relay station, or a balloon station, etc.
  • Multiple base stations may support the above-mentioned networks of the same technology, or may support the above-mentioned networks of different technologies.
  • a base station may contain one or more co-sited or non-co-sited TRPs.
  • the network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), and/or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario.
  • terminal 103 or terminal 104 is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc. ); can also be deployed in the air (eg on airplanes, balloons, satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal can be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal device, industrial control (industrial) control), in-vehicle terminal equipment, terminals in self-driving, terminals in assisted driving, terminals in remote medical, terminals in smart grid, terminals in transportation safety ( Terminals in transportation safety), terminals in smart cities, terminals in smart homes, and so on.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit application scenarios.
  • a terminal may also sometimes be referred to as terminal equipment, user equipment (UE), access terminal, vehicle-mounted terminal, industrial control terminal, UE unit, UE station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, UE terminal equipment, wireless communication equipment, machine terminal, UE proxy or UE device, etc.
  • Terminals can be fixed or mobile.
  • the terminal may be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for the intelligent design of daily wear and the development of wearable devices using wearable technology, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories.
  • Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the terminal 103 or the terminal 104 can be dual-connected to the network device 101 and the network device 102 , wherein one network device is the MN and the other network device is the SN.
  • One or more serving cells in the MN form a master cell group (MCG).
  • the MCG includes a primary cell (primary cell, PCell), and in addition to the PCell, the MCG optionally includes one or more secondary cells (secondary cell, SCell).
  • One or more serving cells in the SN form a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG), and the SCG includes a PSCell.
  • the SCG optionally includes one or more SCells.
  • the terminal 103 or the terminal 104 may perform CPAC.
  • the terminal 103 may perform CPA through Example 1 described below and CPC through Example 2 described below.
  • Example 1 the terminal 103 establishes an RRC connection with the network device 101, and the network device needs to configure a CPA for the terminal 103 to establish a connection with the network device 102 as an example for introduction.
  • the network device 101 After the network device 101 establishes an RRC connection with the terminal 103, it can configure one or more candidate PSCells for the terminal 103, and send an add SN request message to the network device to which the one or more candidate PSCells belong, wherein the add SN request message includes a or the identifiers of multiple candidate PSCells.
  • the network device to which the one or more candidate PSCells belong After the network device to which the one or more candidate PSCells belong receives the request information for adding SNs, it selects the candidate PSCells and sends a message 1 to the network device 101, where the message 1 includes the identifiers of the filtered candidate PSCells and the correspondence of the filtered candidate PSCells.
  • the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the screened candidate PSCell is used to indicate the radio resource configuration corresponding to the screened candidate PSCell.
  • the network device 101 After receiving the message 1, the network device 101 sends a message 2 to the terminal 103, wherein the message 2 includes the identifier of the screened candidate PSCell, the measurement identifier corresponding to the screened candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the screened candidate PSCell .
  • the terminal 103 After receiving the message 2, the terminal 103 determines the addition conditions of the screened candidate PSCells according to the corresponding measurement identifiers of the screened candidate PSCells, detects the addition conditions of the screened PSCells, and detects the addition conditions of at least one candidate PSCell that satisfies the addition conditions. In this case, one of the candidate PSCells that satisfies the addition condition (for example, a candidate PSCell configured by the network device 102 for the terminal) is selected, and the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell is applied. Subsequently, the terminal 103 initiates random access with the candidate PSCell, and after the random access to the candidate PSCell is successful, a dual connection is established with the network device 101 and the network device 102 .
  • the candidate PSCells that satisfies the addition condition for example, a candidate PSCell configured by the network device 102 for the terminal
  • the terminal 103 initiates random access with the candidate PSCell, and after the
  • the terminal 103 is dual-connected to the network device 101 and the network device 102, the network device 101 is the MN, the network device 102 is the current serving SN corresponding to the terminal, and the network device 101 triggers the CPC as an example.
  • the network device 101 determines the message 3, where the message 3 includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list 1 and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the network device 101 sends a message requesting to add a candidate SN to the candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN receives the message requesting the addition of the candidate SN, and sends a message 4 to the network device 101, wherein the message 4 includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list 2 and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the above request increases
  • the message of the candidate SN does not include the identifier of the candidate PSCell determined by the network device 101, so the candidate PSCell list 2 and the candidate PSCell list 1 may be the same or different, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell is used to indicate the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell.
  • the network device 101 After receiving the message 4, the network device 101 determines the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the message 3 and the message 4, the measurement identifier and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, and sends the message 5 to the terminal 103, wherein , the message 5 includes the identifier of the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, and the radio resource configuration information.
  • the terminal 103 After receiving the message 5, the terminal 103 determines the change condition corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, detects the change condition of the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, and detects at least In the case of a candidate PSCell that satisfies the change condition, select one of the candidate PSCells that satisfies the change condition (eg, a candidate PSCell configured by the network device 105 for the terminal), and apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell. Subsequently, the terminal 103 initiates random access with the candidate PSCell, and establishes dual connections with the network device 101 and the network device 105 after the random access to the candidate PSCell is successful.
  • the terminal 103 initiates random access with the candidate PSCell, and establishes dual connections with the network device 101 and the network device 105 after the random access to the candidate PSCell is successful.
  • the addition condition of the candidate PSCell is used by the terminal to determine whether to add the candidate PSCell. For example, when the terminal detects that the candidate PSCell satisfies the addition condition of the candidate PSCell, the terminal determines to apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell, and adds the candidate PSCell. When the terminal detects that the candidate PSCell does not satisfy the addition condition of the candidate PSCell, the terminal determines not to apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell, and does not add the candidate PSCell.
  • the change condition of the candidate PSCell is used by the terminal to determine whether to change the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell. For example, when the terminal detects that the candidate PSCell satisfies the change condition of the candidate PSCell, the terminal determines to apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell, and changes the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell. When the terminal detects the candidate PSCell If the change condition of the candidate PSCell is not satisfied, the terminal determines not to apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell, and does not change the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell.
  • the addition condition or change condition of the candidate PSCell includes the execution event type of the addition/change condition of the candidate PSCell.
  • the execution event type may also be referred to as a measurement event or a reporting event or the like.
  • the terminal can measure the signal quality of the candidate PSCell, or measure the signal quality of the candidate PSCell and the signal quality of the adjacent cells of the candidate PSCell, or measure the signal quality of the candidate PSCell and the signal quality of the PSCell currently connected to the terminal, and according to The measurement result and the execution event type determine whether to add the candidate PSCell, or determine whether to change the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell.
  • the execution event type includes one or more events or the same event with multiple different configurations, for example, the execution event type may include one or more of the following events: event A3, event A4, event A5, Event B1, or Event B2.
  • event A3 indicates that the signal quality of the neighboring cell is greater than or equal to a certain offset (offset) than the signal quality of a special cell (special cell, SpCell).
  • special cell special cell
  • Event A4 indicates that the signal quality of the neighboring cell is greater than or equal to a certain threshold.
  • Event A5 indicates that the signal quality of SpCell is less than or equal to threshold 1 (threshold 1), and the signal quality of neighboring cells is greater than or equal to threshold 2 (threshold 2).
  • Event B1 indicates that the signal quality of neighboring cells across radio access technologies (inter radio access technology, inter RAT) is greater than or equal to a certain threshold.
  • Event B2 indicates that the PCell signal quality is less than or equal to threshold 3 (threshold 3), and the signal quality of the adjacent cells of the inter RAT is greater than or equal to threshold 4 (threshold 4).
  • the above events are only examples of events in the execution event type, and the execution event type may also include other events, which are not limited.
  • the execution event type further includes a threshold value corresponding to the event in the execution event type.
  • the execution event type further includes a time length (timeToTrigger) that satisfies the event in the execution event type, and/or a hysteresis value (hysteresis) when entering/leaving the event in the execution event type.
  • the events in the execution event type may correspond to one or more threshold values, for example, the event A5 corresponds to two threshold values.
  • the same event in the execution event type may correspond to different measurement quantities, for example, event A3 may correspond to A3 reference signal received power (reference signal received power, RSRP) and A3 reference signal received quality (reference signal received quality, RSRQ).
  • the same event with multiple configurations may refer to the same event corresponding to different measurement quantities, or the same measurement quantity in the same event has different configurations.
  • the terminal When the execution event type includes multiple events or the same event of multiple configurations, when these multiple events or the same event of multiple configurations are satisfied at the same time, the terminal considers that the detected candidate PSCell satisfies the addition of the candidate PSCell. condition or change condition.
  • the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell is used for the terminal to communicate with the candidate PSCell after adding the candidate PSCell.
  • the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell is used for the terminal to communicate with the candidate PSCell after changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell.
  • the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell includes at least one of the following information: the random access resource allocated by the candidate PSCell to the terminal, the cell radio network temporary identifier (cell radio network temporary identifier, C-RNIT) , the global cell identifier (cell global identification, CGI) of the candidate PSCell, the physical cell identifier (physical cell identifier, PCI) of the candidate PSCell, and the frequency information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the cell radio network temporary identifier cell radio network temporary identifier, C-RNIT
  • CGI cell global identification
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the frequency information corresponding to the candidate PSCell may include one or more of the following: the absolute frequency of the synchronization signal block (such as absoluteFrequencySSB), the absolute frequency position of the reference resource module (common RB0) (such as absoluteFrequencyPointA), the frequency bandwidth list (such as frequencyBandList) ), sub-carrier spacing (SCS) specific carrier list (such as scs-SpecificCarrierList), etc.
  • the absolute frequency of the synchronization signal block such as absoluteFrequencySSB
  • the absolute frequency position of the reference resource module such as absoluteFrequencyPointA
  • the frequency bandwidth list such as frequencyBandList
  • SCS sub-carrier spacing
  • the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell further includes resource information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the resource information corresponding to the candidate PSCell includes one or more of the following: bearer configuration parameters (radioBearerConfig), cell group configuration (cellGroupConfig) parameters, physical (physical, PHY) layer configuration parameters, media access control (media access control, MAC) Layer configuration parameters, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer configuration parameters, Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer configuration parameters, Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer Configuration parameters or RRC layer configuration parameters.
  • the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell may also be referred to as the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell, etc., which is not limited.
  • the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell also includes configuration information of other SCells in the SCG corresponding to the candidate PSCell (for example, physical layer configuration parameters corresponding to the SCell). Further, the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell may be an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC reconfiguration message includes the above information.
  • the measurement identifier corresponding to a candidate PSCell corresponds to the addition/change condition of the candidate PSCell.
  • the measurement identifier corresponding to a candidate PSCell corresponds to the addition condition of the candidate PSCell.
  • the measurement identifier corresponding to a candidate PSCell corresponds to the change condition of the candidate PSCell.
  • the measurement identifier may be associated with a measurement object identifier (measObjectID) and a measurement reporting configuration identifier (ReportConfigId).
  • the measurement object identifier is used to identify the measurement object configuration, and the measurement object configuration includes the frequency points to be measured, or the measurement object configuration includes the frequency points of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the measurement identifier.
  • the measurement object configuration may further include other information such as how to obtain the measurement result of the signal quality of the cell according to the measurement result of the signal quality of the reference signals of each beam in the cell.
  • the measurement reporting configuration identifier is used to identify the measurement reporting configuration, and the measurement reporting configuration includes the addition/change conditions of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the measurement identifier.
  • the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell can be associated with the conditional reconfiguration identifier (ConReconfigID) corresponding to the candidate PSCell, or a conditional reconfiguration identifier can be used to Identifies a CPA configuration or CPC configuration, where the CPA configuration or CPC configuration includes the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • ConReconfigID conditional reconfiguration identifier
  • a CPA configuration or CPC configuration may also be referred to as the conditional PSCell addition/change (CPAC) configuration of the candidate PSCell, the CPC configuration of the candidate PSCell, the CPA configuration of the candidate PSCell, the CPAC configuration information of the candidate PSCell, the candidate PSCell.
  • CPAC conditional PSCell addition/change
  • the CPC configuration information or the CPA configuration information of the candidate PSCell may be the same or different.
  • the conditional reconfiguration identifiers corresponding to different candidate PSCells are different.
  • the network side needs to modify the addition/change conditions of the candidate PSCell, and/or the radio resource configuration information of the candidate PSCell, and/or cancel the configuration of the candidate PSCell (that is, the terminal does not need to judge the addition/change conditions of the candidate PSCell)
  • the conditional reconfiguration identifier of the candidate PSCell may be carried in the message sent to the terminal, so that the terminal can determine the candidate PSCell to be modified.
  • the measurement identifiers and conditional reconfiguration identifiers corresponding to candidate PSCell 1, candidate PSCell 2, and candidate PSCell 3 may be as follows: the measurement identifier corresponding to candidate PSCell 1 is measID 1, and the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to candidate PSCell 1 is ConReconfigID 1.
  • the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell 2 is measID 1, and the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell 1 is ConReconfigID 2.
  • the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell 3 is measID 3, and the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell 1 is ConReconfigID 3.
  • the message 2 in the above example 1 further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the message 5 in the above example 2 also includes the conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the network device 101 will determine the message 3, and send a message requesting to add a candidate SN to the candidate SN.
  • the network device 101 also receives message 4 from the candidate SN.
  • the network device 101 determines the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the message 3, determines the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the message 4, and sends the message 5 to the terminal 103.
  • the network device 101 needs to associate the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell through the identifier of the candidate PSCell to obtain the information to be configured in the message 5, and then send the message 5 to the terminal.
  • the processing procedure of the device 101 is complicated.
  • the network device 101 will not receive the message 4 until the message 3 is determined, so the network device 101 needs to save the information in the message 3 before receiving the message 4, which requires additional memory of the network device 101 to save.
  • the network The device 101 may not be able to determine the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 .
  • the candidate PSCell list 1 including candidate PSCell 1 and candidate PSCell 2 and the candidate PSCell list 2 including candidate PSCell 2 and candidate PSCell 3 as an example, if the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 determined by the network device 101 is the candidate PSCell 1 , and the candidate PSCell list 2 does not include the candidate PSCell 1. Therefore, the network device 101 cannot determine the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell 1 according to the message 4.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method: the MN sends the first message to the candidate SN, the first A message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first identifier is used to indicate the condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier .
  • the candidate SN After receiving the first message, the candidate SN sends a second message to the MN.
  • the second message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the corresponding first identifier of each candidate PSCell.
  • Radio resource configuration information, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the MN After receiving the second message, the MN sends a third message to the terminal.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the wireless radio corresponding to each candidate PSCell. Resource configuration information.
  • the MN will send the first message to the candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN may determine the second candidate PSCell list according to the first candidate PSCell list, and send the second message to the MN.
  • the MN does not need to determine the measurement identifier and radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal, but sends part or all of the second message determined by the candidate SN to the terminal. Therefore, the processing procedure of the MN can be simplified and the overhead of the MN can be reduced.
  • the MN sends part or all of the second message determined by the candidate SN to the terminal, and the MN does not have the problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the communication method For a specific introduction of the communication method, reference may be made to the method shown in FIG. 3 below.
  • the above example 2 is the case where the MN triggers the CPC.
  • the source SN can also trigger the CPC.
  • the following example 3 can be referred to.
  • Example 3 the terminal 103 is dual-connected to the network device 101 and the network device 102, the network device 101 is the MN, the network device 102 is the current serving SN corresponding to the terminal, and the network device 102 triggers the CPC as an example.
  • the network device 102 sends a message 6 to the network device 101, where the message 6 includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list 3 and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the network device 101 After receiving the message 6, the network device 101 sends a message requesting to add a candidate SN to the candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN After receiving the message requesting to add the candidate SN, the candidate SN sends a message 7 to the network device 101, wherein the message 7 includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list 4 and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the list 4 and the candidate PSCell list 3 may be the same or different, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell is used to indicate the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell.
  • the network device 101 After receiving the message 7, the network device 101 determines the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the message 6 and the message 7, the measurement identifier and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, and sends the message 8 to the terminal 103, wherein , the message 8 includes the identifier of the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, and the radio resource configuration information.
  • the terminal 103 determines the change condition corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, detects the change condition of the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103, and detects at least In the case of a candidate PSCell that satisfies the change condition, select one of the candidate PSCells that satisfies the change condition (eg, a candidate PSCell configured by the network device 105 for the terminal), and apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell. Subsequently, the terminal 103 initiates random access with the candidate PSCell, and establishes dual connections with the network device 101 and the network device 105 after the random access to the candidate PSCell is successful.
  • the network device 101 will receive the message 6 from the network device 102, and the network device 101 will also receive the message 7 from the candidate SN. Subsequently, the network device 101 determines the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the message 6, determines the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 according to the message 7, and sends the message 8 to the terminal 103.
  • the network device 101 needs to associate the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell through the identifier of the candidate PSCell, obtain the information to be configured in the message 8, and then send the message 8 to the terminal.
  • the processing procedure of the device 101 is complicated.
  • the network device 101 will not receive the message 7 until after receiving the message 6, so the network device 101 needs to save the information in the message 6 before receiving the message 7, which requires additional memory of the network device 101 to save.
  • the candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list 3 is determined by the source SN, and the candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list 4 is determined by the candidate SN, in the case where the candidate PSCell list 4 includes the candidate PSCell that is not in the candidate PSCell list 3,
  • the network device 101 may not be able to determine the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 .
  • the candidate PSCell list 4 including the candidate PSCell 2 and the candidate PSCell 3 as an example, therefore, the network device 101 cannot determine the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell 3 according to the message 7. .
  • the candidate PSCell list 3 includes candidate PSCells not in the candidate PSCell list 4
  • the network device 101 may not be able to determine the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal 103 .
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a Communication method: the source SN sends a fourth message to the MN, where the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first identifier is used to indicate that it is currently connected to the terminal The condition of changing the PSCell to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier.
  • the MN After receiving the fourth message, the MN sends the first message to the candidate SN, where the first message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the first message further includes a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the candidate SN After receiving the first message, the candidate SN sends a second message to the MN, where the second message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the second message further includes a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the MN After receiving the second message, the MN sends a third message to the terminal.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the wireless radio corresponding to each candidate PSCell. Resource configuration information.
  • the source SN will send the fourth message to the MN, and the MN will send the first message to the candidate SN after receiving the fourth message.
  • the candidate SN After the candidate SN receives the first message, it can determine the second candidate PSCell according to the first candidate PSCell list. list and send a second message to the MN. Since the MN sends the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list sent by the source SN to the candidate SN, the candidate SN determines each candidate in the second candidate list according to the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate list Identifies the PSCell, and configures the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the MN can find the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate list from the first message sent by the source SN, and the MN will not be unable to determine the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell or the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell. question. Further, when the first message and the second message include the first identifier, after receiving the second message, the MN does not need to determine the measurement identifier and radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell configured for the terminal, but determines the candidate SN as the corresponding measurement identifier and the radio resource configuration information. Part or all of the second message is sent to the terminal. Therefore, the processing procedure of the MN can be simplified and the overhead of the MN can be reduced. For a specific introduction of the communication method, reference may be made to the method shown in FIG. 4 below.
  • the communication system 10 shown in FIG. 1 is only used for example, and is not used to limit the technical solution of the present application. Those skilled in the art should understand that in the specific implementation process, the communication system 10 may also include other devices, and the number of network devices and terminals may also be determined according to specific needs, which is not limited.
  • each network element in FIG. 1 in this embodiment of the present application may be a functional module in one device.
  • the functional module can be an element in a hardware device, for example, a communication chip or a communication component in a terminal or a network device, or a software functional module running on hardware, or a platform (for example, a cloud Virtualization functions instantiated on the platform).
  • each network element in FIG. 1 may be implemented by the communication device 20 in FIG. 2 .
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a communication device applicable to this embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 20 includes at least one processor 201 and at least one communication interface 204, and is used for implementing the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 20 may also include a communication line 202 and a memory 203 .
  • the processor 201 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors for controlling the execution of the programs of the present application. integrated circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • Communication line 202 may include a path, such as a bus, for transferring information between the components described above.
  • the communication interface 204 can be any device such as a transceiver, such as an Ethernet interface, a radio access network (RAN) interface, a wireless local area network (WLAN) interface, a transceiver, a pin , bus, or transceiver circuit, etc.
  • RAN radio access network
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • Memory 203 may be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM) or other types of information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, CD-ROM storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or capable of carrying or storing desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and capable of being executed by a computer Access any other medium without limitation.
  • the memory may exist independently and be coupled to the processor 201 through the communication line 202 .
  • the memory 203 may also be integrated with the processor 201 .
  • the memory provided by the embodiments of the present application may generally be non-volatile.
  • the memory 203 is used for storing computer-executed instructions involved in executing the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 201 .
  • the processor 201 is configured to execute the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 203, thereby implementing the method provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-executed instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program codes, which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 201 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 2 .
  • the communication apparatus 20 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 201 and the processor 207 in FIG. 2 .
  • processors can be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the communication apparatus 20 may further include an output device 205 and/or an input device 206 .
  • Output device 205 is coupled to processor 201 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 205 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait.
  • Input device 206 is coupled to processor 201 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 206 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensor device, or the like.
  • the above-mentioned communication apparatus 20 may be a general-purpose device or a dedicated device.
  • the communication device 20 may be a desktop computer, a portable computer, a network server, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wireless terminal device, an embedded device, a wearable device, or a device shown in FIG. 2 . equipment of similar structure.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the communication device 20 .
  • A/B may indicate A or B
  • a and/or may be used to describe There are three kinds of relationships between related objects, for example, A and/or B, which can be expressed as: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
  • words such as “first” and “second” may be used to distinguish technical features with the same or similar functions.
  • the words “first”, “second” and the like do not limit the quantity and execution order, and the words “first”, “second” and the like do not limit the difference.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to represent examples, illustrations or illustrations, and any embodiment or design solution described as “exemplary” or “for example” should not be construed are preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs.
  • the use of words such as “exemplary” or “such as” is intended to present the relevant concepts in a specific manner to facilitate understanding.
  • the network device and/or the terminal may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application, these steps are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other steps or variations of various steps .
  • various steps may be performed in different orders presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it may not be necessary to perform all the steps in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the specific structure of the execution body of the communication method is not particularly limited in the embodiments of the present application, as long as the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be implemented.
  • the executive body of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be an MN, or a component applied in the MN, such as a chip, which is not limited in this application.
  • the execution subject of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a candidate SN, or a component applied in the candidate SN, for example, a chip, which is not limited in this application.
  • the execution subject of the communication method provided in this embodiment of the present application may be the source SN, or a component applied in the source SN, such as a chip, which is not limited in this application.
  • the execution subject of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal, or a component applied in the terminal, such as a chip, which is not limited in this application. The following embodiments are described by taking the execution subject of the communication method as the MN, the candidate SN, the source SN, and the terminal as an example.
  • a communication method is provided in an embodiment of the present application, and the communication method is introduced by taking the MN triggering the CPC as an example.
  • the CPC may be an inter-SN CPC (inter-SN CPC), or may be an intra-SN CPC (intra-SN CPC).
  • the inter-SN CPC means that the source SN is different from the candidate SN, and the source SN is the SN currently connected to the terminal.
  • intra-SN CPC means that the source SN and the candidate SN are the same SN.
  • the communication method includes steps 301-303.
  • Step 301 The MN sends a first message to the candidate SN.
  • the MN may be referred to as a master node, a master base station, or the like.
  • the MN may be the network device 101 or the network device 102 in FIG. 1 .
  • the candidate SN may be referred to as a candidate secondary node, a candidate secondary base station, or the like.
  • the candidate SN may be the network device 105 in FIG. 1 .
  • the candidate SN is configured by the MN for the terminal.
  • the terminal may be the terminal 103 or the terminal 104 in FIG. 1 .
  • the MN sends a first message to each candidate SN.
  • the first message may have the following two situations:
  • the first message may include an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured (or recommended) by the MN for the terminal.
  • the at least one candidate PSCell is a cell of a candidate SN.
  • At least one candidate PSCell is a PSCell with better signal quality detected by the MN, or a PSCell selected by the MN according to a preset algorithm.
  • any candidate PSCell list may also be referred to as a candidate PSCell set, which is used to represent one or more candidate PSCells.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes candidate PSCell 1, candidate PSCell 2, and candidate PSCell 3.
  • the first identification is determined (or generated) by the MN.
  • the first identifier is used to indicate the change condition of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier, that is, the first identifier is used to indicate the condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier, and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the measurement identifier and the conditional reconfiguration identifier reference may be made to the corresponding description in FIG. 1 , which will not be repeated.
  • the content included in the first message may be as shown in Table 1.
  • the first message shown in Table 1 includes candidate PSCell 1, measurement ID 1 corresponding to candidate PSCell 1, conditional reconfiguration ID 1 corresponding to candidate PSCell 1, candidate PSCell 2, measurement ID 2 corresponding to candidate PSCell 2, and candidate PSCell 2 corresponding to Conditional reconfiguration identifier 2, candidate PSCell 3, measurement identifier 3 corresponding to candidate PSCell 3, and conditional reconfiguration identifier 3 corresponding to candidate PSCell 3.
  • the first message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell. Further optionally, the first message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the measurement identities and conditional reconfiguration identities are determined (or generated) by the MN.
  • the content included in the first message may be as shown in Table 2.
  • the first message shown in Table 2 includes candidate PSCell 1, measurement identifier 1 corresponding to candidate PSCell 1, candidate PSCell 2, measurement identifier 2 corresponding to candidate PSCell 2, candidate PSCell 3, and measurement identifier 3 corresponding to candidate PSCell 3.
  • the above Table 1 and Table 2 are only examples of the first message.
  • the first message may also have other forms.
  • the first message may also be represented in the form of a set.
  • the first message may also include more or fewer rows than Table 1 or Table 2, and more or fewer columns than Table 1 or Table 2, without limitation. Taking the example that the first message includes fewer rows than Table 2, the first message may include the first row in Table 2, that is, the first message includes the candidate PSCell 1, and the measurement identifier 1 corresponding to the candidate PSCell 1.
  • the MN in addition to determining the measurement identifier and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier, the MN also determines the measurement object identifier and the measurement reporting configuration identifier associated with the measurement identifier. That is to say, the MN can also determine the measurement object configuration and the measurement reporting configuration corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the configuration of the measurement object and the configuration of the measurement report reference may be made to the corresponding description in FIG. 1 , which will not be repeated.
  • the MN may send the seventh message to the terminal before step 303 .
  • the seventh message is used to indicate the measurement identifier, the measurement object identifier and the measurement reporting configuration identifier associated with the measurement identifier, so that after receiving the seventh message, the terminal determines the measurement object configuration and the measurement reporting configuration corresponding to the measurement identifier according to the seventh message.
  • the first message further includes second indication information, so that the candidate SN determines that the MN triggers the conditional PSCell change.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN.
  • the MN sends the second indication information to the source SN, so that the source SN determines that the MN triggers the conditional PSCell change.
  • the source SN may send confirmation information to the MN, where the confirmation information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change triggered by the MN is accepted.
  • the first message is an RRC message.
  • the first message may also be referred to as a SN add request message.
  • the candidate SN receives the first message from the MN.
  • Step 302 The candidate SN sends a second message to the MN according to the first message.
  • the second message may also be referred to as an SN addition response message.
  • the second message may include the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell reference may be made to the corresponding description in FIG. 1 above, which will not be repeated.
  • the second message may include the first information.
  • the first information includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first information may further include a condition configuration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list. It can be understood that if in the above situation 2, the first message does not include the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the second message includes the second candidate PSCell list corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • Conditional reconfiguration identifiers are determined (or generated) for candidate SNs.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list. That is, the candidate SN is to determine all or part of the candidate PSCells in the first candidate PSCell list as candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the second candidate PSCell list may include candidate PSCell 1, candidate PSCell 2 and candidate PSCell 3.
  • the second candidate PSCell list may include candidate PSCell 1 and candidate PSCell 2.
  • the second candidate PSCell list may include candidate PSCell 1 and candidate PSCell 3.
  • the second candidate PSCell list may include candidate PSCell 2 and candidate PSCell 3.
  • the second candidate PSCell list may include candidate PSCell 1.
  • the second candidate PSCell list may include candidate PSCell 2.
  • the second candidate PSCell list may include candidate PSCell 3.
  • the candidate SN may determine the candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list with good signal quality as the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the candidate SN may randomly determine the candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list as the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the content included in the second message may be shown in Table 3.
  • the second message shown in Table 3 includes candidate PSCell 2, measurement ID 2 corresponding to candidate PSCell 2, conditional reconfiguration ID 2 corresponding to candidate PSCell 2, candidate PSCell 3, measurement ID 3 corresponding to candidate PSCell 3, and candidate PSCell 3 The corresponding conditional reconfiguration flag 3.
  • Table 3 is only an example of the second message.
  • the second message may also have other forms.
  • the second message may also be represented in the form of a set.
  • the second message may also include more or fewer rows than Table 3, more or fewer columns than Table 3, without limitation. Taking the example that the second message includes fewer rows than Table 3, the second message may include the first row in Table 3, that is, the second message includes the candidate PSCell 2, the measurement identifier 2 corresponding to the candidate PSCell 2, and the corresponding measurement identifier 2 of the candidate PSCell 2.
  • Conditional reconfiguration flag 2 2.
  • the second message includes the identifier of the candidate PSCell, the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell, and the corresponding candidate PSCell. wireless resource configuration information.
  • the candidate SN does not send the second message, or the candidate SN sends the second message, the second message is used to indicate that the candidate SN determines not to select the candidate PSCell. The candidate PSCell is selected.
  • the candidate SN can send a second message to the MN after receiving multiple first messages, the The second message is used to instruct the candidate SN to determine not to select the candidate PSCell indicated in the plurality of first messages.
  • the first information is an RRC reconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration) message.
  • the MN receives the second message from the candidate SN.
  • Step 303 The MN sends a third message to the terminal.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the MN after receiving the second message, the MN obtains the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and send a third message to the terminal.
  • the third message includes the first information.
  • the MN may not perceive the first information, that is, the MN does not parse the first information.
  • the MN After receiving the second message, the MN directly includes the first information in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal. In this way, the MN can send the third message to the terminal using the conventional technology without adding a new cell to indicate the first information.
  • the first information is an RRC reconfiguration message generated by the candidate SN
  • the MN generates an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC reconfiguration message generated by the MN includes the RRC reconfiguration message generated by the candidate SN.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the Conditional reconfiguration identifiers corresponding to each candidate PSCell and radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list included in the third message is determined (or generated) by the MN.
  • the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the third message may be included in the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the third message further includes second indication information.
  • the MN may trigger the CPC
  • the source SN may also trigger the CPC.
  • the measurement identifier/condition reconfiguration identifier may be determined (or generated) by the MN
  • the measurement identifier/condition reconfiguration identifier may be determined (or generated) by the source SN
  • the measurement object configuration and measurement reporting configuration corresponding to the measurement identifier/condition reconfiguration identifier determined by the MN may be different from the measurement object configuration and measurement reporting configuration corresponding to the measurement identifier/condition reconfiguration identifier determined by the source SN.
  • the terminal does not know whether the measurement identifier in the third message is determined by the MN or determined by the source SN, and the terminal will not be able to repeat the measurement based on the measurement identifier/condition.
  • the configuration identifier determines the measurement object configuration and measurement reporting configuration.
  • the method for the MN to send the second indication information to the terminal is not only applied to the method of the present application, but also can be applied to the conventional technology, so that the terminal can determine according to the second indication information that the measurement identity sent by the MN to the terminal is the MN. It is determined by the source SN.
  • the second indication information may also be included in the message 5 in the above example 2.
  • the message 3 and/or the message 4 in the foregoing example 2 may also include the second indication information.
  • the second indication information may be indicated by a cell.
  • the second indication information may be indicated by the name of the cell or the value of the cell. For example, taking the information element 1 used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN, and the information element 2 used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN as an example, if the third message includes the information element 1, it means that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN. If the third message includes information element 2, it means that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN.
  • the third message including the information element 3 is used to indicate whether the change of the conditional PSCell is triggered by the MN or the source SN as an example, if the value of the information element 3 is 0, it means that The conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN. If the value of cell 3 is 1, it means that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN, and vice versa.
  • the third message includes information element 4, it indicates that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN, and if the third message does not include information element 4, it indicates that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN.
  • the second indication information may also be indicated by a choice structure. For the introduction of the choice structure, reference may be made to the explanations in the conventional technology, which will not be repeated.
  • the third message is an RRC message.
  • the terminal receives the third message from the MN.
  • the terminal receives the third message and sends the fifth message to the MN.
  • the fifth message is used to indicate to the MN that the terminal has received the third message. It can be understood that the fifth message does not include a message sent by the terminal to the source SN and/or the candidate SN.
  • the MN may determine the sixth message according to the fifth message, and send the sixth message to the first SN.
  • the sixth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the third message or to instruct the terminal to receive the CPA configuration or the CPC configuration.
  • the first SN includes at least one of the source SN and the candidate SN.
  • the fifth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives the third message.
  • the fifth message includes a message sent by the terminal to the first SN.
  • the MN After receiving the fifth message, the MN forwards the message sent by the terminal to the first SN to the first SN.
  • the terminal after receiving the third message, performs a conditional PSCell change according to the third message. Further, after receiving the third message, the terminal determines the measurement object configuration and the measurement reporting configuration of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list according to the third message. The terminal also detects the change condition indicated by the measurement reporting configuration corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and when detecting at least one candidate PSCell that satisfies the change condition, selects one of the candidate PSCells and applies the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell.
  • the terminal determines, according to the third message, the measurement object configuration and the measurement reporting configuration of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, including: if the third message includes the first identifier, the first identifier includes the measurement identifier, or the first identifier It includes a measurement identifier and a conditional reconfiguration identifier, and the terminal determines the measurement object configuration and the measurement reporting configuration of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list according to the measurement identifier.
  • the terminal determines the measurement identifier corresponding to the conditional reconfiguration identifier according to the conditional reconfiguration identifier, and determines the measurement identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list according to the measurement identifier. Measurement object configuration and measurement reporting configuration. If the third message includes the first information, the terminal determines the measurement object configuration and the measurement reporting configuration of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list according to the measurement identifier.
  • the source SN or the candidate SN triggers the release of the second candidate PSCell list, the measurement object configuration corresponding to the candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or the wireless Resource configuration information.
  • the storage overhead of the source SN, the candidate SN and the terminal can be saved, and the utilization rate of resources can also be improved, so that the source SN or the candidate SN can allocate the released resources to other terminals.
  • the source SN triggers the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or the radio resource configuration information
  • the first candidate PSCell is any one in the second candidate PSCell list or Taking multiple candidate PSCells as an example, the source SN sends an eighth message to the MN, where the eighth message is used to indicate the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or the radio resource configuration information
  • the eighth message includes the identifier of the first candidate PSCell and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to the first candidate PSCell.
  • the MN After receiving the eighth message, the MN sends a ninth message to the terminal and a tenth message to the candidate SN, where the ninth message is used to instruct the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or Or, the radio resource configuration information, the tenth message is used to instruct to release the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the first candidate PSCell.
  • the candidate SN sends the eleventh message to the MN.
  • the eleventh message is used to indicate the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or the radio resource configuration information
  • the eleventh message includes the identifier of the first candidate PSCell, and /or, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, or the eleventh message includes the index of the first candidate PSCell.
  • the MN After the MN receives the eleventh message, according to the content of the eleventh message, the MN can determine that the CPC configuration of the first candidate PSCell needs to be released, send the twelfth message to the terminal, and send the thirteenth message to the source SN.
  • the message is used to indicate the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or the radio resource configuration information
  • the thirteenth message is used to indicate the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, And/or, measurement reporting configuration.
  • the above-mentioned eleventh message includes the index of the first candidate PSCell
  • the above-mentioned first message also includes the index of the first candidate PSCell. In this case, when the candidate SN needs to release the CPC configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, the candidate SN only needs to send the index of the first candidate PSCell to the MN.
  • the MN sends the fourteenth message to the candidate SN.
  • the fourteenth message is used to indicate the release of the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and the fourteenth message includes the identifier of the first candidate PSCell and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, or the fourteenth
  • the message includes the index of the first candidate PSCell.
  • the MN sends a fifteenth message to the terminal and a sixteenth message to the source SN, where the fifteenth message is used to indicate the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or the radio resource Configuration information, the sixteenth message is used to instruct to release the measurement object configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, and/or the measurement reporting configuration.
  • the above-mentioned fourteenth message includes the index of the first candidate PSCell
  • the above-mentioned first message also includes the index of the first candidate PSCell.
  • the MN when the MN needs to release the CPC configuration corresponding to the first candidate PSCell, the MN only needs to send the index of the first candidate PSCell to the candidate SN.
  • the terminal determines whether the candidate PSCell satisfies the change condition according to the change condition of the candidate PSCell. When the change condition of at least one PSCell is satisfied, select one candidate PSCell that satisfies the condition, and apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell. Subsequently, the terminal may send a message to the MN, the message carries indication information, and the indication information includes the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal, or the identifier of the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal.
  • the candidate PSCell corresponds to Compared with the identifier of the candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier requires fewer bits. Therefore, compared with the case where the indication information includes the identifier of the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal, the indication information includes the corresponding candidate PSCell selected by the terminal. In the case of reconfiguring the identifier under certain conditions, the signaling overhead is saved. After receiving the above message, the MN can determine the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal according to the indication information.
  • the MN can send a message to the SN corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal, the message is used to notify the SN corresponding to the candidate PSCell, the terminal has selected the candidate PSCell in the SN or the candidate PSCell in the SN meets the requirements Conditional PSCell change condition.
  • the terminal After the terminal selects the candidate PSCell, the terminal initiates random access with the candidate PSCell, and after successful random access to the candidate PSCell, establishes a dual connection with the MN and the SN corresponding to the candidate PSCell. It can be understood that this embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of the first message, the second message or the third message.
  • each third message corresponds to the related information of one or more candidate PSCells of a candidate SN (for example, the identifier of one or more candidate PSCells, the one or more candidate PSCells The corresponding first identifier, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate PSCells). It can be understood that if the MN sends a third message to the terminal, the third message may include information about the candidate PSCell of each candidate SN among the multiple candidate SNs.
  • the MN may determine the first message and send the first message to the candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN may select a candidate PSCell (ie, a candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list) from the first candidate PSCell list, and send the second message to the MN.
  • the MN After receiving the second message, the MN includes all or part of the messages in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal, so that the terminal performs CPC according to the third message.
  • the MN does not need to store the relevant information in the first message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the corresponding measurement identification), saving the storage overhead of the MN.
  • the MN also does not need to associate the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, which simplifies the processing process of the MN and reduces the overhead of the NM. , which shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list are selected and processed from the first candidate PSCell list, and after receiving the second message, the MN includes all or part of the content in the second message in the third message When it is sent to the terminal, there will be no problem that the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the method shown in FIG. 3 is described by taking the MN triggering the CPC as an example, and the following describes the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application by taking the source SN triggering the CPC as an example.
  • the communication method is introduced by taking the source SN triggering the CPC as an example.
  • the CPC may be an inter-SN CPC (inter-SN CPC), or may be an intra-SN CPC (intra-SN CPC).
  • the communication method includes steps 401-404.
  • Step 401 The source SN sends a fourth message to the MN.
  • the source SN may be referred to as a source secondary node, a source secondary base station, or the like.
  • the source SN is the SN that has established a connection with the terminal currently.
  • the source SN may be the network device 101 or the network device 102 in FIG. 1 .
  • the terminal may be the terminal 103 or the terminal 104 in FIG. 1 .
  • the MN may be referred to as a master node, a master base station, or the like. If the source SN is the network device 101 in FIG. 1 , the MN may be the network device 102 in FIG. 1 , and if the source SN is the network device 102 in FIG. 1 , the MN may be the network device 101 in FIG. 1 .
  • the source SN determines the fourth message and sends the fourth message to the MN.
  • the fourth message may also be referred to as a SN change request (SN change required) message.
  • the fourth message can have the following two situations:
  • the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured (or recommended) by the source SN for the terminal.
  • the at least one candidate PSCell is a cell of one candidate SN, and may also be a cell of multiple candidate SNs.
  • the candidate SN is the source SN configured for the terminal. This application does not limit the number of candidate SNs.
  • the candidate SN may be the network device 105 in FIG. 1 .
  • For the introduction of the first identifier reference may be made to the corresponding description in the method shown in FIG. 3 . The difference is that the first identifier in the method shown in FIG. 4 is determined (or generated) by the source SN.
  • At least one candidate PSCell is a PSCell with better signal quality detected by the source SN, or a PSCell selected by the source SN according to a preset algorithm.
  • any candidate PSCell list may also be referred to as a candidate PSCell set, which is used to represent one or more candidate PSCells.
  • the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell. Further optionally, the fourth message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list. The measurement identification and the conditional reconfiguration identification are determined (or generated) by the source SN.
  • the source SN in addition to determining the measurement identifier and/or the conditional reconfiguration identifier, the source SN also determines the measurement object identifier and the measurement reporting configuration identifier associated with the measurement identifier. That is to say, the source SN can also determine the measurement object configuration and the measurement reporting configuration corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the configuration of the measurement object and the configuration of the measurement report reference may be made to the corresponding description in FIG. 1 , which will not be repeated.
  • the source SN may directly send the seventeenth message to the terminal before step 303, or send the seventeenth message to the terminal through the MN.
  • the seventeenth message is used to indicate the measurement identifier, the measurement object identifier and the measurement reporting configuration identifier associated with the measurement identifier, so that after receiving the thirteenth message, the terminal determines the measurement object configuration corresponding to the measurement identifier according to the thirteenth message and Measurement reporting configuration.
  • the fourth message further includes first indication information, so that the MN determines that the source SN triggers the conditional PSCell change.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN.
  • the MN receives the fourth message from the source SN.
  • Step 402 The MN sends a first message to the candidate SN.
  • the MN sends the first message to each candidate SN.
  • the first message may also be referred to as a SN add request message.
  • the first message has the following two cases:
  • the first message may include the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first message may include the identifiers of some candidate PSCells in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first identifiers corresponding to these candidate PSCells.
  • the first message has the following three cases:
  • the first message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell. Further optionally, the first message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the first message may include identifiers of some candidate PSCells in the first candidate PSCell list, and measurement identifiers corresponding to these candidate PSCells. Further optionally, the first message further includes conditional reconfiguration identifiers corresponding to these candidate PSCells.
  • the first message includes the identifiers of some or all of the candidate PSCells in the first candidate PSCell list. Further optionally, the first message further includes conditional reconfiguration identifiers corresponding to these candidate PSCells.
  • the first message further includes first indication information, so that the candidate SN determines that the source SN triggers the conditional PSCell change.
  • the candidate SN receives the first message from the MN.
  • Step 403 The candidate SN sends a second message to the MN according to the first message.
  • the second message may also be referred to as an SN addition response message.
  • the second message may include the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell reference may be made to the corresponding description in FIG. 1 above, which will not be repeated.
  • the second message may include the first information.
  • the first information includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first information may further include a condition configuration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the second message may include the first information.
  • the first information includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, and radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first information may further include a condition configuration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the second candidate PSCell list, and the first candidate PSCell list reference may be made to the corresponding description in the method shown in FIG. 3 above, and details are not repeated.
  • the first information is an RRC reconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration) message.
  • the MN receives the second message from the candidate SN.
  • Step 404 The MN sends a third message to the terminal.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the MN after receiving the second message, the MN obtains the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and send a third message to the terminal.
  • the third message includes the first information.
  • the MN may not perceive the first information, that is, the MN does not parse the first information.
  • the MN After receiving the second message, the MN directly includes the first information in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal. In this way, the MN can send the third message to the terminal using the conventional technology without adding a new cell to indicate the first information.
  • the first information is an RRC reconfiguration message generated by the candidate SN
  • the MN generates an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC reconfiguration message generated by the MN includes the RRC reconfiguration message generated by the SN.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the Conditional reconfiguration identifiers corresponding to each candidate PSCell and radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list included in the third message corresponds to that determined (or generated) by the MN.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the MN can find the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell from the fourth message according to the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the third message. Further, if the first candidate PSCell list in the fourth message also includes the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the MN can also find the conditional reconfiguration corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list from the fourth message. Configuration ID.
  • the MN may generate a conditional reconfiguration identifier for each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, or the second candidate PSCell The list includes the conditional reconfiguration identifier of each candidate PSCell.
  • the MN can obtain the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and then the MN sends a third message to the terminal device, and the third message includes the second candidate The identifier of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the third message may be included in the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the third message further includes the first indication information.
  • the MN may trigger the CPC
  • the source SN may also trigger the CPC.
  • the measurement ID/condition reconfiguration ID may be determined (or generated) by the MN
  • the measurement ID/conditional reconfiguration ID may be determined (or generated) by the source SN.
  • the measurement object configuration and measurement reporting configuration corresponding to the measurement identifier/condition reconfiguration identifier determined by the MN may be different from the measurement object configuration and measurement reporting configuration corresponding to the measurement identifier/condition reconfiguration identifier determined by the source SN.
  • the terminal does not know whether the measurement identifier in the third message is determined by the MN or determined by the source SN, and the terminal will not be able to repeat the measurement based on the measurement identifier/condition.
  • the configuration identifier determines the measurement object configuration and measurement reporting configuration.
  • the method for the MN to send the first indication information to the terminal is not only applied to the method of the present application, but also can be applied to the conventional technology, so that the terminal can determine according to the first indication information that the measurement identity sent by the MN to the terminal is the MN. determined, or determined by the source SN, so that the terminal can determine, according to the first indication information, whether the candidate PSCell change condition corresponding to the measurement identifier is configured by the MN or by the SN, and the terminal can determine the measurement object corresponding to the measurement identifier configured by the MN or SN.
  • the configuration and measurement report configuration are used to determine the change condition of the candidate PSCell.
  • the message 8 in the above example 3 may also include the first indication information.
  • the message 6 and/or the message 7 in the above example 3 may also include the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may be indicated by a cell.
  • the first indication information may be indicated by the name of the cell or the value of the cell.
  • the third message is an RRC message.
  • the terminal receives the third message from the MN.
  • each fourth message corresponds to the related information of one or more candidate PSCells of a candidate SN (for example, the identifier of one or more candidate PSCells, and one or more candidate PSCells). the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell). It can be understood that if the source SN sends a fourth message to the MN, the fourth message may include information about the candidate PSCell of each candidate SN among the multiple candidate SNs.
  • the MN may receive the fourth message from the source SN, and send the first message to the candidate SN according to the fourth message.
  • the candidate SN may select a candidate PSCell (ie, a candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list) from the first candidate PSCell list, and send the second message to the MN.
  • the MN After receiving the second message, the MN includes all or part of the messages in the second message in the third message and sends it to the terminal, so that the terminal performs CPC according to the third message.
  • the MN does not need to store the relevant information in the fourth message corresponding to the candidate PSCell (such as the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the corresponding measurement identifier), saving the storage overhead of the MN.
  • the MN also does not need to associate the first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell with the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, which simplifies the processing process of the MN and reduces the overhead of the NM. , which shortens the time for the terminal to perform CPC.
  • the candidate PSCells in the second candidate PSCell list are selected and processed from the first candidate PSCell list, and after receiving the second message, the MN includes all or part of the content in the second message in the third message
  • the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell or the measurement identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell cannot be determined.
  • the method shown in FIG. 3 above uses the MN-triggered CPC as an example to introduce the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application
  • the method shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 4 uses the source SN to trigger the CPC as an example to introduce the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal may also send a fifth message to the MN, where the fifth message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the third message.
  • the terminal may also send the message 2 to the MN for indicating that the message 1 is received.
  • the following describes the processing method of the terminal after the terminal receives the message from the MN for indicating the addition/change condition and configuration of the candidate PSCell.
  • the communication method can be applied to the condition of MN-triggered PSCell addition/change, or the communication method can be applied to the inter-SN CPC triggered by the source SN, or the communication method can be applied to the intra-SN triggered by the source SN CPC.
  • the communication method includes steps 501-503.
  • Step 501 The MN sends a first message to the terminal.
  • the MN may be called a master node or a master base station or the like.
  • the MN may be the network device 101 or the network device 102 in FIG. 1 .
  • the terminal may be the terminal 103 or the terminal 104 in FIG. 1 .
  • the first message is used to indicate the addition/change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list.
  • the candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured for the terminal by the MN or the source SN.
  • the at least one candidate PSCell is a cell of one candidate SN, and may also be a cell of multiple candidate SNs.
  • the candidate SN is configured by the source SN or MN for the terminal. This application does not limit the number of candidate SNs.
  • the candidate SN may be the network device 105 in FIG. 1 .
  • the candidate SN may be referred to as a candidate secondary node or a candidate secondary base station, or the like.
  • the source SN may be referred to as a source secondary node or a source secondary base station, or the like.
  • the source SN is the SN currently connected to the terminal. If the MN is the network device 101 in FIG. 1 , the source SN may be the network device 102 in FIG. 1 ; if the MN is the network device 102 in FIG. 1 , the source SN may be the network device 101 in FIG. 1 .
  • the first message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • first identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell reference may be made to the corresponding description in the method shown in FIG. 3 above, which will not be repeated.
  • the first message further includes first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN, or used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN.
  • the first message is an RRC message.
  • the terminal receives the first message from the MN.
  • the terminal determines whether the terminal device satisfies the condition according to the addition condition or the change condition of the candidate PSCell. When the addition condition or change condition of at least one PSCell is satisfied, select one candidate PSCell that satisfies the condition, and apply the radio resource configuration of the candidate PSCell. Subsequently, the terminal may send a message to the MN, the message carries indication information, and the indication information includes the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal, or the identifier of the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal.
  • the candidate PSCell corresponds to Compared with the identifier of the candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier requires fewer bits. Therefore, compared with the case where the indication information includes the identifier of the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal, the indication information includes the corresponding candidate PSCell selected by the terminal. In the case of reconfiguring the identifier under certain conditions, the signaling overhead is saved. After receiving the above message, the MN can determine the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal according to the indication information.
  • the MN can send a message to the SN corresponding to the candidate PSCell according to the candidate PSCell selected by the terminal, the message is used to notify the SN corresponding to the candidate PSCell, the terminal has selected the candidate PSCell in the SN or the candidate PSCell in the SN meets the requirements Conditional PSCell change condition.
  • the terminal After the terminal selects the candidate PSCell, the terminal initiates random access with the candidate PSCell, and after successful random access to the candidate PSCell, establishes a dual connection with the MN and the SN corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • Step 502 The terminal sends a second message to the MN.
  • the terminal sends the second message to the MN when it detects at least one candidate PSCell that satisfies the addition/change condition.
  • the second message has the following two situations:
  • Case 5 The second message is used to indicate to the MN that the terminal has received the first message. It can be understood that the second message does not include a message sent by the terminal to the source SN and/or the candidate SN.
  • the second message is used to indicate that the terminal receives the first message.
  • the second message includes a message sent by the terminal to the first SN.
  • the second message is an RRC message.
  • the MN receives the second message from the terminal.
  • Step 503 The MN sends a third message to the first SN according to the second message.
  • the first SN is at least one of the candidate SNs determined by the MN for the terminal.
  • the first SN is the MN or the source SN is at least one of the candidate SN and the source SN determined by the terminal.
  • the MN can determine the third message according to the second message, and send the third message to the first SN.
  • the third message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the first message or to instruct the terminal to receive the CPA configuration or the CPC configuration.
  • the MN forwards the message sent by the terminal to the first SN to the first SN.
  • the first SN receives the third message from the MN. After receiving the third message, the first SN may determine that the terminal has received the first message or that the terminal has received the CPA configuration or the CPC configuration according to the third message.
  • the identifier of the candidate PSCell in the third message may be included in the radio resource configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • the first SN after receiving the third message, the first SN triggers the release of the measurement object configuration corresponding to the candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, and/or the measurement reporting configuration, and/or the radio resource configuration information. Specifically, reference may be made to the corresponding description in the method shown in FIG. 3 above, which will not be repeated.
  • the terminal may send a second message to the MN, the second message may not include the message sent by the terminal to the first SN.
  • the MN may determine (or generate) the third message according to the second message, and send the third message to the first SN, so that the first SN determines that the terminal has received the first message.
  • the foregoing mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements.
  • the above-mentioned MN, candidate SN, source SN or terminal, etc. include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the unit and algorithm operations of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in hardware or in the form of a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • functional modules can be divided into MNs, candidate SNs, source SNs, or terminals according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one in the processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that, the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 60 .
  • the communication device 60 includes a transceiver module 601 .
  • the communication device 60 may be used to implement the functions of the MN.
  • the communication device 60 is, for example, the MN described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication device 60 may be an MN, or a chip applied in the MN or other combined devices or components having the above-mentioned MN functions.
  • the transceiver module 601 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver may include an antenna, a radio frequency circuit, and the like.
  • the transceiver module 601 may be a radio frequency unit.
  • the transceiver module 601 may be an input/output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip). It should be understood that the transceiver module 601 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • transceiving module 601 may be used to perform all transceiving operations performed by the MN in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as step 301, step 302, step 303, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein .
  • the transceiver module 601 can be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the MN in the embodiment shown in FIG. other processes of technology.
  • the transceiver module 601 is configured to send a first message to the candidate SN, where the first message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, where the first identifier is used to indicate A condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to receive a second message from the candidate SN, where the second message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the corresponding first identifier of each candidate PSCell. Radio resource configuration information, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to send a third message to the terminal, where the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resources corresponding to each candidate PSCell configuration information.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to receive a fourth message from the source SN, where the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source SN for the terminal.
  • the third message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the communication apparatus 60 for the terminal, and the first identifier is determined by the communication apparatus 60 .
  • the third message further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus 60 .
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to receive a fifth message from the terminal, and the fifth message is used to indicate to the communication device 60 that the terminal has received the third message; the transceiver module 601 is further configured to receive the third message according to the fifth message.
  • a sixth message is sent to the first SN, where the sixth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives the third message, and the first SN includes at least one SN among the source SN and the candidate SN.
  • the transceiver module 601 is configured to send a first message to the candidate SN, where the first message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the transceiver module 601 is configured to receive a second message from a candidate SN, the second message includes first information, the first information includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and each candidate PSCell.
  • Conditional reconfiguration identifiers corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the transceiver module 601 is configured to send a third message to the terminal, where the third message includes the first information.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to receive a fourth message from the source SN, where the fourth message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first A candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured for the terminal by the source SN.
  • the first message also includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list
  • the fourth message also includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list .
  • the third message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN.
  • the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the communication apparatus 60 for the terminal, and the measurement identifier is determined by the communication apparatus 60 .
  • the third message further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus 60 .
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to receive a fifth message from the terminal, and the fifth message is used to indicate to the communication device 60 that the terminal has received the third message; the transceiver module 601 is further configured to receive the third message according to the fifth message.
  • a sixth message is sent to the first SN, where the sixth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives the third message, and the first SN includes at least one SN among the source SN and the candidate SN.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 70 .
  • the communication device 70 includes a transceiver module 701 .
  • the communication device 70 may be used to implement the function of the candidate SN.
  • the communication device 70 is, for example, the candidate SN described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication apparatus 70 may be a candidate SN, or may be a chip applied in the candidate SN or other combined devices or components having the above-mentioned candidate SN functions.
  • the transceiver module 701 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver may include an antenna, a radio frequency circuit, and the like.
  • the transceiver module 701 may be a radio frequency unit.
  • the transceiver module 701 may be an input/output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip). It should be understood that the transceiver module 701 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • transceiving module 701 may be configured to perform all transceiving operations performed by candidate SNs in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as step 301, step 302, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiving module 701 may be configured to perform all transceiving operations performed by the candidate SN in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as step 402, step 403, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 701 is configured to receive a first message from the MN, where the first message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, where the first identifier is used to indicate A condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier.
  • the transceiver module 701 is further configured to send a second message to the MN according to the first message, where the second message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and each candidate PSCell Corresponding radio resource configuration information, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the transceiver module 701 is further configured to receive a sixth message from the MN, where the sixth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives a third message, the third message is a message sent by the MN to the terminal, and the third message includes The identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the transceiver module 701 is configured to receive a first message from the MN, where the first message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list and a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the transceiver module 701 is further configured to send a second message to the MN according to the first message, where the second message includes first information, the first information includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, and the measurement corresponding to each candidate PSCell identifier, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the first message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the transceiver module 701 is further configured to receive a sixth message from the MN, where the sixth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives a third message, the third message is a message sent by the MN to the terminal, and the third message includes first information.
  • the communication device 70 When the communication device 70 is used to implement the function of the candidate SN, for other functions that the communication device 70 can implement, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or the related introduction of the method embodiment shown in FIG. .
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 80 .
  • the communication device 80 includes a processing module 801 and a transceiver module 802 .
  • the communication device 80 is used to implement the function of the source secondary node.
  • the communication device 80 is, for example, the source-secondary node described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication apparatus 80 may be a source auxiliary node, or may be a chip applied in the source auxiliary node, or other combined devices or components having the above-mentioned function of the source auxiliary node.
  • the processing module 801 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor, and the baseband processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 802 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver may include an antenna, a radio frequency circuit, and the like.
  • the processing module 801 may be a processor (or, a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 802 may be a radio frequency unit.
  • the processing module 801 may be a processor (or, a processing circuit) of the system-on-chip, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the transceiver module 802 may be an input and output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip).
  • processing module 801 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component (or referred to as a processing circuit), and the transceiver module 802 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 801 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the source secondary node in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the transceiving operations, such as determining the fourth message, and/or to support the techniques described herein other processes.
  • Transceiver module 802 may be used to perform all transceiving operations performed by the source and secondary nodes in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as step 401, and/or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 801 is configured to determine a fourth message, where the fourth message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and a first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first candidate PSCell list includes the communication device 80 For at least one candidate PSCell configured for the terminal, the first identifier is used to indicate the condition for changing the PSCell currently connected to the terminal to the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier.
  • the transceiver module 802 is configured to send a fourth message to the MN.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the fourth message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus 80 .
  • the transceiver module 802 is further configured to receive a sixth message from the MN, where the sixth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives a third message, the third message is a message sent by the MN to the terminal, and the third message includes The identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • the processing module 801 is configured to determine a fourth message, where the fourth message includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list, and a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first candidate PSCell list includes the communication device 80 as At least one candidate PSCell configured by the terminal.
  • the transceiver module 802 is configured to send a fourth message to the MN.
  • the fourth message further includes a conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell in the first candidate PSCell list.
  • the fourth message further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the communication apparatus 80 .
  • the transceiver module 802 is further configured to receive a sixth message from the MN, where the sixth message is used to indicate that the terminal receives a third message, the third message is a message sent by the MN to the terminal, and the third message includes First information, the first information includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the radio resource configuration corresponding to each candidate PSCell information, the first candidate PSCell list includes the second candidate PSCell list.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 90 .
  • the communication device 90 is used to realize the functions of the terminal.
  • the communication device 90 is, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or the terminal described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication device 90 includes a transceiver module 901 and a processing module 902 .
  • the communication device 90 may be a terminal, or may be a chip applied in the terminal or other combined devices or components having the above-mentioned terminal functions.
  • the transceiver module 901 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 902 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor, and the baseband processor may Include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 901 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 902 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 901 may be an input/output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip), and the processing module 902 may be a processor (or a processing circuit) of the chip system, which may include one or more central processing units unit.
  • transceiver module 901 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component
  • processing module 902 may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component (or referred to as a processing circuit).
  • the transceiving module 901 may be used to perform all transceiving operations performed by the terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as step 303, and/or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 902 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 except for the transceiving operations, such as performing conditional PSCell changes according to the third message, and/or for supporting the techniques described herein other processes.
  • the transceiving module 901 may be configured to perform all transceiving operations performed by the terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as step 404, and/or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 902 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the transceiving operations, such as performing conditional PSCell changes according to the third message, and/or for supporting the techniques described herein other processes.
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to receive a third message from the MN.
  • the third message includes the identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, the first identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the wireless radio corresponding to each candidate PSCell.
  • the resource configuration information and the first indication information wherein the candidate PSCells included in the second candidate PSCell list are all included in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured for the communication device 90 by the source SN or MN , the first identifier is used to indicate that the PSCell currently connected to the communication device 90 is the condition of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the first identifier, the source SN is the SN that is currently connected to the communication device 90, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is Triggered by the source SN, or used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN.
  • the processing module 902 is configured to perform conditional PSCell change according to the third message.
  • the first identifier includes a measurement identifier and/or a conditional reconfiguration identifier.
  • the transceiver module 901 is further configured to send a fifth message to the MN, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the MN that the communication apparatus 90 receives the third message.
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to receive a third message from the MN, where the third message includes first information, and the first information includes an identifier of each candidate PSCell in the second candidate PSCell list, and a measurement identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, The conditional reconfiguration identifier corresponding to each candidate PSCell, the radio resource configuration information corresponding to each candidate PSCell, and the first indication information, wherein the candidate PSCells included in the second candidate PSCell list are all included in the first candidate PSCell list, and the first The candidate PSCell list includes at least one candidate PSCell configured by the source SN or MN for the communication device 90, the source SN is the SN that is currently establishing a connection with the communication device 90, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the source SN, or Used to indicate that the conditional PSCell change is triggered by the MN.
  • the processing module 902 is configured to perform conditional PSCell change according to the third message.
  • the transceiver module 901 is further configured to send a fifth message to the MN, where the fifth message is used to indicate to the MN that the communication apparatus 90 receives the third message.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 100 .
  • the communication device 100 includes a transceiver module 1001 .
  • the communication apparatus 100 may be used to implement the functions of the MN.
  • the communication device 100 is, for example, the MN described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the communication apparatus 100 may be an MN, or may be a chip applied in the MN or other combined devices, or components, etc., which have the above-mentioned MN functions.
  • the transceiver module 1001 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver may include an antenna, a radio frequency circuit, and the like.
  • the transceiver module 1001 may be a radio frequency unit.
  • the transceiver module 1001 may be an input and output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip). It should be understood that the transceiver module 1001 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • transceiving module 1001 may be used to perform all transceiving operations performed by the MN in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as step 501, step 502, step 503, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein .
  • the transceiver module 1001 is configured to send a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate the addition/change conditions and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list.
  • the transceiver module 1001 is further configured to receive a second message from the terminal, where the second message is used to indicate to the communication apparatus 100 that the terminal has received the first message.
  • the transceiver module 1001 is further configured to send a third message to the first SN according to the second message, where the third message is used to instruct the terminal to receive the first message.
  • the first SN is at least one of the candidate SNs determined by the communication apparatus 100 for the terminal
  • the first message is used to indicate the change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list
  • the first SN is the candidate SN determined by the communication device 100 or the source SN for the terminal and at least one of the source SNs
  • the source SN is the SN that is currently establishing a connection with the terminal.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 110 .
  • the communication device 110 includes a transceiver module 1101 .
  • the communication device 110 may be used to implement the functions of the terminal.
  • the communication device 110 is, for example, the terminal described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the communication apparatus 110 may be a terminal, or may be a chip applied in the terminal or other combined devices or components having the above-mentioned terminal functions.
  • the transceiver module 1101 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver may include an antenna, a radio frequency circuit, and the like.
  • the transceiver module 1101 may be a radio frequency unit.
  • the transceiver module 1101 may be an input and output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip). It should be understood that the transceiver module 1101 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the transceiving module 1101 may be configured to perform all transceiving operations performed by the terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as step 501, step 502, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1101 is configured to receive a first message from the MN, where the first message is used to indicate the addition/change conditions and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list.
  • the transceiver module 1101 is further configured to send a second message to the MN, where the second message is used to indicate to the MN that the communication device 110 has received the first message.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 120 .
  • the communication device 120 is used to implement the function of the first SN.
  • the communication device 120 is, for example, the first SN described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the communication device 120 includes a transceiver module 1201 and a processing module 1202 .
  • the communication device 120 may be the first SN, or may be a chip applied in the first SN or other combined devices or components having the above-mentioned first SN function.
  • the transceiver module 1201 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 1202 may be a processor (or, a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor, a baseband processor can include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 1201 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1202 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1201 may be an input/output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip), and the processing module 1202 may be a processor (or a processing circuit) of the chip system, which may include one or more central processing units unit.
  • transceiver module 1201 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component
  • processing module 1202 may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component (or referred to as a processing circuit).
  • the transceiving module 1201 may be used to perform all transceiving operations performed by the first SN in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as step 503, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the processing module 1202 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 except the transceiving operation, such as determining that the terminal has received the first message according to the third message, and/or to support the operations described herein. Other procedures of the described techniques.
  • the transceiver module 1201 receives a third message from the MN, the third message is used to indicate that the terminal receives the first message, and the first message is used to indicate the addition/change conditions and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the PSCell list , the third message is determined by the MN according to the second message sent by the terminal, and the second message is used to indicate to the MN that the terminal has received the first message.
  • the processing module 1202 is configured to determine, according to the third message, that the terminal has received the first message.
  • the communication device 120 when the first message is used to indicate the addition condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the communication device 120 is at least one of the candidate SNs determined by the MN for the terminal, and In the case where the first message is used to indicate the change condition and radio resource configuration of each candidate PSCell in the candidate PSCell list, the communication device 120 is at least one of the candidate SN and the source SN determined by the MN or the source SN for the terminal, the source SN. It is the SN that currently establishes a connection with the terminal.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication system.
  • the communication system 130 may include: MN 1301, candidate SN 1302, source SN 1303 and terminal 1304. It should be noted that FIG. 13 is only an exemplary drawing, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the network elements and the number of network elements included in the communication system 130 shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the MN 1301 has the functions of the communication device 60 shown in FIG. 6 above, and can be used to send the first message to the candidate SN 1302, receive the second message from the candidate SN 1302, and send the third message to the terminal 1304.
  • the candidate SN 1302 has the function of the above-mentioned communication device 70 shown in FIG. 7 , and can be used to receive the first message from the MN 1301, and send the second message to the MN 1301 according to the first message.
  • the source SN 1303 has the function of the above-mentioned communication device 80 shown in FIG. 8 , and can be used to determine the fourth message and send the fourth message to the MN 1301.
  • the terminal 1304 has the function of the above-mentioned communication device 90 shown in FIG. 9 , and can be used to receive the third message from the MN 1301, and perform a conditional PSCell change according to the third message.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication system.
  • the communication system 140 may include: an MN 1401, a first SN 1402, and a terminal 1403.
  • FIG. 14 is only an exemplary drawing, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the network elements and the number of network elements included in the communication system 140 shown in FIG. 14 .
  • the MN 1401 has the functions of the communication device 100 shown in Figure 10 above, and can be used to send a first message to the terminal 1403, receive a second message from the terminal 1403, and send a third message to the first SN 1402 according to the second message.
  • the first SN 1402 has the function of the communication device 110 shown in FIG. 11 above, and can be used to receive the first message from the MN 1401 and send the second message to the MN 1401.
  • the terminal 1403 has the function of the communication device 120 shown in FIG. 12, and can receive the third message from the MN 1401, and determines that the terminal 1403 has received the first message according to the third message.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be Incorporation may either be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, which are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions to make a device (may be a single chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a ROM, a RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk and other mediums that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了通信方法及装置，涉及无线通信领域，可以简化主基站的处理过程，降低主基站的开销，缩短终端进行条件主辅小区(primary secondary cell，PSCell)变更(conditional PSCell change，CPC)的时间。该方法包括：主基站向候选辅基站发送包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识的第一消息；主基站接收来自候选辅基站的包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的第二消息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表；主基站向终端发送包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的第三消息。

Description

通信方法及装置 技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。
背景技术
在无线通信技术领域中，为了提升用户的吞吐率，引入了双连接(dual connectivity，DC)技术。DC可以支持两个或两个以上基站同时为一个终端提供数据传输服务。这些基站中包括一个主基站，以及一个或多个辅基站。其中，主基站可以与终端建立无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)连接，并可以与终端之间传输RRC消息，主基站还与核心网建立控制面连接。辅基站可以与终端之间传输部分RRC消息，该部分RRC消息包括用于测量小区的信号质量的测量配置信息、或测量报告等。
终端与主基站建立RRC连接后，可以进行条件主辅小区(primary secondary cell，PSCell)添加(conditional PSCell addition，CPA)，与辅基站建立连接。终端与主基站和辅基站都建立连接后，还可以进行条件PSCell变更(conditional PSCell change，CPC)，来变更与终端连接的PSCell。终端进行CPC的过程中，主基站会确定候选PSCell的变更条件，主基站还会接收来自候选辅基站的候选PSCell的配置信息，并确定向终端发送的候选PSCell的变更条件和候选PSCell的配置信息，处理过程复杂。
发明内容
本申请提供一种通信方法及装置，可以简化主基站的处理过程，降低主基站的开销，缩短终端进行CPC的时间。
为达到上述目的，本申请的实施例采用如下技术方案：
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：主基站向候选辅基站发送第一消息，该第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，该第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；主基站接收来自候选辅基站的第二消息，该第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表；主基站向终端发送第三消息，该第三消息包括该第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
基于上述第一方面提供的方法，一方面，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第一消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站也不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的第一标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另一方面，第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell是从第一候选PSCell列表中选择处理的，主基站接收到第二消息后，是将第二 消息中的全部或部分内容包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。基于上述方法，可以通过测量标识和/或条件重配置标识指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：主基站接收来自源辅基站的第四消息，该第四消息包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该源辅基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。基于上述方法，一方面，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第四消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站也不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的第一标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另一方面，第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell是从第一候选PSCell列表中选择处理的，主基站接收到第二消息后，是将第二消息中的全部或部分内容包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，或者候选PSCell对应的测量标识的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，该第三消息还包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源辅基站触发的。基于上述方法，终端可以确定条件PSCell变更是有源辅基站触发的。在这种情况下，终端可以根据测量标识，以及源辅基站确定的测量标识与测量对象配置的对应关系确定测量对象配置，根据测量标识，以及源辅基站确定的测量标识与测量上报配置的对应的关系确定测量上报配置。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该主基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该第一标识为该主基站确定的。基于上述方法，主基站触发条件PSCell变更的情况下，可以为终端配置至少一个候选PSCell，以及第一标识。
一种可能的实现方式，该第三消息还包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该主基站触发的。基于上述方法，终端可以确定条件PSCell变更是有主基站触发的。在这种情况下，终端可以根据测量标识，以及主基站确定的测量标识与测量对象配置的对应关系确定测量对象配置，根据测量标识，以及主基站确定的测量标识与测量上报配置的对应的关系确定测量上报配置。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：该主基站接收来自该终端的第五消息，该第五消息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到该第三消息；该主基站根据该第五消息向第一辅基站发送第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到该第三消息，该第一辅基站包括该源辅基站与该候选辅基站中的至少一个辅基站。基于上述方法，主基站可以接收来自终端的第五消息，其中，第五消息不包括终端向第一辅基站发送的消息。主基站可以根据第五消息向第一辅基站发送第六消息，以便第一辅基站确定终端接收到第三消息。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：候选辅基站接收来自主基站的第一消息，该第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell 的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；候选辅基站根据第一消息向该主基站发送第二消息，第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。
基于上述第二方面提供的方法，候选辅基站接收到来自主基站的第一消息后，可以可以在第一候选PSCell列表中选择候选PSCell(即第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell)，并向主基站发送第二消息。一方面，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第一消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站也不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的第一标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另一方面，第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell是从第一候选PSCell列表中选择处理的，主基站接收到第二消息后，是将第二消息中的全部或部分内容包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。基于上述方法，可以通过测量标识和/或条件重配置标识指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：候选辅基站接收来自主基站的第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括该第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。基于上述方法，候选辅基站可以根据第六消息确定终端接收到第三消息。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：源辅基站确定第四消息，该第四消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该源辅基站为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该第一标识用于指示当前与该终端连接的PSCell变更为该第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；源辅基站向主基站发送该第四消息。
基于上述第三方面提供的方法，源辅基站确定触发条件PSCell变更的情况下，可以向主基站发送第四消息，以便主基站根据第四消息向候选辅基站发送第一消息。在这种情况下，候选辅基站可以在第一候选PSCell列表中选择候选PSCell(即第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell)，并向主基站发送第二消息。如此，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第四消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站也不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的第一标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。而且第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell是从第一候选PSCell列表中选择处理的，主基站接收到第二消息 后，是将第二消息中的全部或部分内容包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。基于上述方法，可以通过测量标识和/或条件重配置标识指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
一种可能的实现方式，该第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源辅基站触发的。基于上述方法，主基站可以确定条件PSCell变更是由源辅基站触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：源辅基站接收来自该主基站的第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。基于上述方法，源辅基站可以确定终端接收到第三消息。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：终端接收来自主基站的第三消息，该第三消息包括第二候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，该第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，该第一候选PSCell列表包括源辅基站或该主基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该第一标识用于指示当前与该终端连接的PSCell为该第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件，该源辅基站为当前与该终端建立连接的辅基站，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该主基站触发的；终端根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
基于上述第四方面提供的方法，终端可以根据第三消息确定条件PSCell变更是主基站触发的还是源辅基站触发的，进而可以根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。基于上述方法，可以通过测量标识和/或条件重配置标识指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：终端向主基站发送第五消息，该第五消息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到该第三消息。基于上述方法，主基站可以确定终端接收到第三消息，进而主基站可以根据第三消息向第一辅基站发送用于指示终端接收到第三消息的第六消息。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：收发模块；收发模块，用于向候选辅基站发送第一消息，第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，该第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；收发模块，还用于接收来自候选辅基站的第二消息，第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表；收发模块，还用于向该终 端发送第三消息，第三消息包括该第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来自该源辅基站的第四消息，第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该源辅基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，第一候选PSCell列表包括该通信装置为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，第一标识为该通信装置确定的。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该通信装置触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来自该终端的第五消息，第五消息用于向该通信装置指示该终端接收到该第三消息；收发模块，还用于根据第五消息向第一辅基站发送第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，第一辅基站包括源辅基站与候选辅基站中的至少一个辅基站。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：收发模块；收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第一消息，该第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，该第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；收发模块，还用于根据该第一消息向该主基站发送第二消息，该第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来该自主基站的第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括该第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；处理模块，用于确定第四消息，该第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该通信装置为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该第一标识用于指示当前与该终端连接的PSCell变更为该第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；收发模块，用于向主基站发送该第四消息。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该通信装置触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来自该主基站的第六消息，该第六 消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：收发模块和处理模块；收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第三消息，该第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，该第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，该第一候选PSCell列表包括源辅基站或该主基站为该通信装置配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该第一标识用于指示当前与该通信装置连接的PSCell为该第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件，该源辅基站为当前与该通信装置建立连接的辅基站，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该主基站触发的；处理模块，用于根据该第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于向该主基站发送第五消息，该第五消息用于向该主基站指示该通信装置接收到该第三消息。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第一方面、或第一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第二方面、或第二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第三方面、或第三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第四方面、或第四方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第一方面、或第一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第二方面、或第二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第三方面、或第三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或 指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第四方面、或第四方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面、或第一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二方面、或第二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第三方面、或第三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第四方面、或第四方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第一方面、或第一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第二方面、或第二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第三方面、或第三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第四方面、或第四方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第二十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统。该系统包括上述第五方面所述的装置，和/或上述第六方面所述的装置，和/或上述第七方面所述的装置，和/或上述第八方面所述的装置；或者该系统包括上述第九方面所述的装置，和/或上述第十方面所述的装置，和/或上述第十一方面所述的装置，和/或上述第十二方面所述的装置。
可以理解的，上述提供的任一种通信装置、芯片、计算机可读介质、计算机程序产品或通信系统等均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
第二十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：主基站向候选辅基站发送第一消息，该第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；主基站接收来自候选辅基站的第二消息，该第二消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候 选PSCell列表；主基站向终端发送第三消息，该第三消息包括该第一信息。
上述第二十六方面提供的方法，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第一消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站接收到第二消息后，不感知第二消息，而是将第二消息中的第一信息包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的测量标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另外，主基站也不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：主基站接收来自源辅基站的第四消息，第四消息包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，第一候选PSCell列表包括该源辅基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。基于上述方法，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第四消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站接收到第二消息后，不感知第二消息，而是将第二消息中的第一信息包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的测量标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另外，主基站也不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，该第四消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。基于上述方法，第一消息和第四消息中还可以携带条件重配置标识，以便后续修改候选PSCell对应的变更条件和/或候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
一种可能的实现方式，该第三消息还包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的。基于上述方法，终端可以确定条件PSCell变更是有源辅基站触发的。在这种情况下，终端可以根据测量标识，以及源辅基站确定的测量标识与测量对象配置的对应关系确定测量对象配置，根据测量标识，以及源辅基站确定的测量标识与测量上报配置的对应的关系确定测量上报配置。
一种可能的实现方式，第一候选PSCell列表包括该主基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该测量标识为该主基站确定的。基于上述方法，主基站触发条件PSCell变更的情况下，可以为终端配置至少一个候选PSCell，以及测量标识。
一种可能的实现方式，该第三消息还包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该主基站触发的。基于上述方法，终端可以确定条件PSCell变更是有主基站触发的。在这种情况下，终端可以根据测量标识，以及主基站确定的测量标识与测量对象配置的对应关系确定测量对象配置，根据测量标识，以及主基站确定的测量标识与测量上报配置的对应的关系确定测量上报配置。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：主基站接收来自终端的第五消息，第五消 息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到该第三消息；主基站根据第五消息向第一辅基站发送第六消息，第六消息用于指示该终端接收到该第三消息，第一辅基站包括该源辅基站与该候选辅基站中的至少一个辅基站。基于上述方法，主基站可以接收来自终端的第五消息，其中，第五消息不包括终端向第一辅基站发送的消息。主基站可以根据第五消息向第一辅基站发送第六消息，以便第一辅基站确定终端接收到第三消息。
第二十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：候选辅基站接收来自主基站的第一消息，该第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；候选辅基站根据第一消息向该主基站发送第二消息，该第二消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。
基于上述第二十七方面提供的方法，候选辅基站接收到来自主基站的第一消息后，可以可以在第一候选PSCell列表中选择候选PSCell(即第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell)，并向主基站发送第二消息。在这种情况下，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第一消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站接收到第二消息后，不感知第二消息，而是将第二消息中的第一信息包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的测量标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另外，主基站也不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。基于上述方法，第一消息中还可以携带条件重配置标识，以便后续修改候选PSCell对应的变更条件和/或候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：候选辅基站接收来自主基站的第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括该第一信息。基于上述方法，候选辅基站可以根据第六消息确定终端接收到第三消息。
第二十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：源辅基站确定第四消息，该第四消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该源辅基站为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell；源辅基站向主基站发送该第四消息。
基于上述第二十八方面提供的方法，源辅基站确定触发条件PSCell变更的情况下，可以向主基站发送第四消息，以便主基站根据第四消息向候选辅基站发送第一消息。在这种情况下，候选辅基站可以在第一候选PSCell列表中选择候选PSCell(即第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell)，并向主基站发送第二消息。在这种情况下，主基站不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第四消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每 个候选PSCell的标识，和/或，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识)，节省了主基站的存储开销。主基站接收到第二消息后，不感知第二消息，而是将第二消息中的第一信息包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的测量标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了主基站的处理过程，降低了主基站的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另外，主基站也不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
一种可能的实现方式，该第四消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。基于上述方法，第四消息中还可以携带条件重配置标识，以便后续修改候选PSCell对应的变更条件和/或候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
一种可能的实现方式，该第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的。基于上述方法，主基站可以确定条件PSCell变更是由源辅基站触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：源辅基站接收来自该主基站的第六消息，第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。基于上述方法，源辅基站可以确定终端接收到第三消息。
第二十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：终端接收来自主基站的第三消息，该第三消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，该第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，该第一候选PSCell列表包括源辅基站或该主基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该源辅基站为当前与该终端建立连接的辅基站，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该主基站触发的；终端根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
基于上述第二十九方面提供的方法，终端可以根据第三消息确定条件PSCell变更是主基站触发的还是源辅基站触发的，进而可以根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
一种可能的实现方式，该方法还包括：终端向主基站发送第五消息，该第五消息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到该第三消息。基于上述方法，主基站可以确定终端接收到第三消息，进而主基站可以根据第三消息向第一辅基站发送用于指示终端接收到第三消息的第六消息。
第三十方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：收发模块；收发模块，用于向候选辅基站发送第一消息，该第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；收发模块，用于接收来自该候选辅基站的第二消息，该第二消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell 对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表；收发模块，用于向该终端发送第三消息，该第三消息包括该第一信息。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来自该源辅基站的第四消息，该第四消息包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该源辅基站为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，该第四消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，该第三消息还包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该通信装置为该终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该测量标识为该通信装置确定的。
一种可能的实现方式，该第三消息还包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该通信装置触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来自该终端的第五消息，该第五消息用于向该通信装置指示该终端接收到该第三消息；收发模块，还用于根据该第五消息向第一辅基站发送第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到该第三消息，第一辅基站包括该源辅基站与该候选辅基站中的至少一个辅基站。
第三十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：收发模块；收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第一消息，该第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；收发模块，还用于根据该第一消息向该主基站发送第二消息，该第二消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来该自主基站的第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括该第一信息。
第三十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；处理模块，用于确定第四消息，该第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该通信装置为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell；收发模块，用于向主基站发送该第四消息。
一种可能的实现方式，该第四消息还包括该第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，该第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该通信装置触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于接收来自该主基站的第六消息，该第六消息用于指示该终端接收到第三消息，该第三消息为该主基站发送给该终端的消息，该第三消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，该第一候选PSCell列表包括该第二候选PSCell列表。
第三十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：收发模块和处理模块；收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第三消息，该第三消息包括第一信息，该第一信息包括第二候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，该第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，该第一候选PSCell列表包括源辅基站或该主基站为该通信装置配置的至少一个候选PSCell，该源辅基站为当前与该通信装置建立连接的辅基站，该第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该源辅基站触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由该主基站触发的；处理模块，用于根据该第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块，还用于向该主基站发送第五消息，该第五消息用于向该主基站指示该通信装置接收到该第三消息。
第三十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第二十六方面、或第二十六方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第三十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第二十七方面、或第二十七方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第三十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第二十八方面、或第二十八方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第三十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第二十九方面、或第二十九方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第三十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第二十六方面、或第二十六方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第三十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第二十七方面、或第二十七方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第二十八方面、或第二十八方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第二十九方面、或第二十九方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十六方面、或第二十六方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十七方面、或第二十七方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十八方面、或第二十八方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十九方面、或第二十九方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第二十六方面、或第二十六方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第二十七方面、或第二十七方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第二十八方面、或第二十八方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第四十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第二十九方面、或第二十九方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第五十方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统。该系统包括上述第三十方面所述的装置，和/或上述第三十一方面所述的装置，和/或上述第三十二方面所述的装置，和 /或上述第三十三方面所述的装置；或者该系统包括上述第三十四方面所述的装置，和/或上述第三十五方面所述的装置，和/或上述第三十六方面所述的装置，和/或上述第三十七方面所述的装置。
可以理解的，上述提供的任一种通信装置、芯片、计算机可读介质、计算机程序产品或通信系统等均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
第五十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法应用于主基站触发条件主辅小区PSCell添加/变更的情况下，或者该方法应用于源辅基站触发辅基站之间的条件PSCell变更的情况下，该方法包括：主基站向终端发送第一消息，第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置；主基站接收来自该终端的第二消息，第二消息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到第一消息；主基站根据第二消息向第一辅基站发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示该终端接收到该第一消息。
基于上述第五十一方面提供的方法，主基站接收到来自终端的用于向主基站指示终端接收到第一消息的第二消息后，可以根据第二消息向第一SN发送第三消息，以便第一SN确定终端接收到第一消息。
一种可能的实现方式，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一辅基站为主基站为该终端确定的候选辅基站中的至少一个，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的变更条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一辅基站为主基站或该源辅基站为该终端确定的候选辅基站以及该源辅基站中的至少一个，源辅基站为当前与该终端建立连接的辅基站。
第五十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法应用于主基站触发条件主辅小区PSCell添加/变更的情况下，或者该方法应用于源辅基站触发辅基站之间的条件PSCell变更的情况下，该方法包括：终端接收来自主基站的第一消息，第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置；终端向主基站发送第二消息，该第二消息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到该第一消息。
基于上述第五十二方面提供的方法，终端接收到第一消息后，可以向主基站发送用于向主基站指示终端接收到第一消息的第二消息，以便主基站确定终端接收到第一消息，进而主基站可以向第一辅基站指示终端接收到第一消息。
第五十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法应用于主基站触发条件主辅小区PSCell添加/变更的情况下，或者该方法应用于源辅基站触发辅基站之间的条件PSCell变更的情况下，该方法包括：第一辅基站接收来自主基站的第三消息，第三消息用于指示终端接收到第一消息，该第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置，该第三消息为该主基站根据该终端发送的第二消息确定的，该第二消息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到该第一消息；第一辅基站根据该第三消息确定该终端接收到该第一消息。
基于上述第五十三方面提供的方法，第一辅基站可以确定终端接收到第一消息。
一种可能的实现方式，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一辅基站为主基站为终端确定的候选辅基站中的至少一个，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的变更条件和 无线资源配置的情况下，第一辅基站为主基站或源辅基站为该终端确定的候选辅基站以及源辅基站中的至少一个，源辅基站为当前与该终端建立连接的辅基站。
第五十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置应用于通信装置触发条件主辅小区PSCell添加/变更的情况下，或者该通信装置应用于源辅基站触发辅基站之间的条件PSCell变更的情况下，该通信装置包括：收发模块；收发模块，用于向终端发送第一消息，第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置；收发模块，还用于接收来自该终端的第二消息，第二消息用于向该通信装置指示该终端接收到第一消息；收发模块，还用于根据第二消息向第一辅基站发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示该终端接收到该第一消息。
一种可能的实现方式，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一辅基站为通信装置为该终端确定的候选辅基站中的至少一个，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的变更条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一辅基站为通信装置或该源辅基站为该终端确定的候选辅基站以及该源辅基站中的至少一个，源辅基站为当前与该终端建立连接的辅基站。
第五十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置应用于主基站触发条件主辅小区PSCell添加/变更的情况下，或者该通信装置应用于源辅基站触发辅基站之间的条件PSCell变更的情况下，该通信装置包括：收发模块；收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第一消息，第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置；收发模块，还用于向主基站发送第二消息，该第二消息用于向该主基站指示该通信装置接收到该第一消息。
第五十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置应用于主基站触发条件主辅小区PSCell添加/变更的情况下，或者该通信装置应用于源辅基站触发辅基站之间的条件PSCell变更的情况下，该通信装置包括：收发模块和处理模块；收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第三消息，第三消息用于指示终端接收到第一消息，该第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置，该第三消息为该主基站根据该终端发送的第二消息确定的，该第二消息用于向该主基站指示该终端接收到该第一消息；处理模块，用于根据该第三消息确定该终端接收到该第一消息。
一种可能的实现方式，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加条件和无线资源配置的情况下，通信装置为主基站为终端确定的候选辅基站中的至少一个，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的变更条件和无线资源配置的情况下，通信装置为主基站或源辅基站为该终端确定的候选辅基站以及源辅基站中的至少一个，源辅基站为当前与该终端建立连接的辅基站。
第五十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第五十一方面、或第五十一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第五十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行 时，使得该装置实现上述第五十二方面、或第五十二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第五十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该装置实现上述第五十三方面、或第五十三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第五十一方面、或第五十一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第五十二方面、或第五十二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第五十三方面、或第五十三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第五十一方面、或第五十一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第五十二方面、或第五十二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，其包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第五十三方面、或第五十三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第五十一方面、或第五十一方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第五十二方面、或第五十二方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得该芯片实现上述第五十三方面、或第五十三方面任一种可能的实现方式中所述的方法。
第六十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统。该系统包括上述第五十四方面所述的装置，和/或上述第五十五方面所述的装置，和/或上述第五十六方面所述的装置；或者该系统包括上述第五十七方面所述的装置，和/或上述第五十八方面所述的装置， 和/或上述第五十九方面所述的装置。
可以理解的，上述提供的任一种通信装置、芯片、计算机可读介质、计算机程序产品或通信系统等均可以用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的通信系统架构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的硬件结构示意图；
图3至图5为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图；
图6至图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图；
图13至图14为本申请实施例提供的通信系统的组成示意图。
具体实施方式
下面结合附图对本申请实施例的实施方式进行详细描述。
本申请实施例提供的方法可用于各种多无线(或多空口)双连接(multiple radio dual connectivity，MR-DC)架构。例如，第四代(4th generation，4G)通信系统与第五代(5th generation，5G)通信系统的双连接、5G通信系统与4G通信系统的双连接，或者5G通信系统与5G通信系统的双连接，以及未来演进的通信系统例如6G通信系统与其他系统的双连接，或者两个6G系统的双连接等。
其中，4G通信系统与5G通信系统的双连接可以包括：演进通用陆地无线接入(evolved universal terrestrial radio access，E-UTRA)系统和新无线(new radio，NR)系统的双连接(E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity，EN-DC)，和5G核心网下的E-UTRA系统和NR系统的双连接(NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity，NGEN-DC)等。其中，EN-DC也可以称为选项3系列(option 3 series)。EN-DC是以长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)基站，例如eNB，作为主节点(master node，MN)或主基站，以NR基站，例如gNB，作为辅节点(secondary node，SN)或辅基站的DC。EN-DC中，MN和SN分别可以与演进分组核心(evolved packet core，EPC)网(即4G核心网)有数据面连接，为终端与EPC之间的数据提供空口传输资源。NGEN-DC也可以称为选项7系列(option 7 series)。NGEN-DC是以LTE基站，例如ng-eNB，作为MN，以NR基站，例如gNB，作为SN的DC。与EN-DC不同的是，NGEN-DC中，MN和SN都连接5G核心网(5G core network，5GC)，为终端与5GC之间的数据提供空口传输资源。
5G通信系统与4G通信系统的双连接可以包括NR系统和E-UTRA系统的双连接(NR-E-UTRA dual connectivity，NE-DC)等。NE-DC也可以称为选项4系列(option 4 series)。NE-DC是以NR基站，例如gNB，作为MN，以LTE基站，例如ng-eNB，作为SN，并且MN和SN分别可以与5GC有数据面连接，为终端与5GC之间的数据提供空口传输资源。
5G通信系统与5G通信系统的双连接可以包括NR系统与NR系统的DC。NR系统与NR系统的DC中，MN和SN都为NR的基站。
下面仅以图1所示通信系统10为例，对本申请实施例提供的方法进行描述。
如图1所示，为本申请实施例提供的通信系统10的架构示意图。图1中，通信系 统10可以包括网络设备101、网络设备102、网络设备105、终端103和终端104。图1仅为示意图，并不构成对本申请提供的技术方案的适用场景的限定。
图1中的网络设备，例如：网络设备101、网络设备102或网络设备105可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。包括但不限于：LTE中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，NR中的基站(gNodeB或gNB)或收发点(transmission receiving point/transmission reception point，TRP)，3GPP后续演进的等。基站可以是：宏基站，微基站，微微基站，小站，中继站，或，气球站等。多个基站可以支持上述提及的同一种技术的网络，也可以支持上述提及的不同技术的网络。基站可以包含一个或多个共站或非共站的TRP。网络设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、集中单元(centralized unit，CU)，和/或，分布单元(distributed unit，DU)。
图1中的终端，例如：终端103或终端104是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载；也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等)；还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。所述终端可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的终端、车载终端设备、无人驾驶(self driving)中的终端、辅助驾驶中的终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。终端有时也可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、车载终端、工业控制终端、UE单元、UE站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、UE终端设备、无线通信设备、机器终端、UE代理或UE装置等。终端可以是固定的，也可以是移动的。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请中，终端可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。
图1中，终端103或终端104可以与网络设备101和网络设备102双连接，其中，一个网络设备为MN，另一个网络设备为SN。MN中的一个或多个服务小区组成主小区组(master cell group，MCG)。MCG包括主小区(primary cell，PCell)，除了PCell，MCG还可选地包括一个或多个辅小区(secondary cell，SCell)。SN中的一个或多个服务小区组成辅小区组(secondary cell group，SCG)，SCG包括PSCell，除了PSCell，SCG还可选地包括一个或多个SCell。
在图1所示的通信系统10中，终端103或终端104可以进行CPAC。例如，终端 103可以通过下述示例1进行CPA，通过下述示例2进行CPC。
示例1，以终端103与网络设备101建立了RRC连接，网络设备需要为终端103配置CPA，与网络设备102建立连接为例进行介绍。网络设备101与终端103建立RRC连接后，可以为终端103配置一个或多个候选PSCell，并向该一个或多个候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送增加SN请求消息，其中，增加SN请求消息包括一个或多个候选PSCell的标识。该一个或多个候选PSCell所属的网络设备接收到增加SN请求信息后，筛选候选PSCell并向网络设备101发送消息1，其中，消息1包括筛选后的候选PSCell的标识以及筛选后的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，筛选后的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息用于指示筛选后的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置。网络设备101接收到消息1后，向终端103发送消息2，其中，消息2包括筛选后的候选PSCell的标识、筛选后的候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及筛选后的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。终端103接收到消息2后，根据筛选后的候选PSCell对应的测量标识确定筛选后的候选PSCell的添加条件，检测筛选后的PSCell的添加条件，并在检测到至少一个满足添加条件的候选PSCell的情况下，选择其中一个满足添加条件的候选PSCell(例如网络设备102为终端配置的候选PSCell)，应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置。后续，终端103与该候选PSCell发起随机接入，并在候选PSCell随机接入成功之后，与网络设备101和网络设备102建立了双连接。
示例2，以终端103与网络设备101和网络设备102双连接，网络设备101为MN，网络设备102为终端对应的当前服务SN，网络设备101触发CPC为例进行介绍。网络设备101确定消息3，其中，消息3包括候选PSCell列表1中每个候选PSCell的标识和每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识。网络设备101向候选SN发送请求增加候选SN的消息。候选SN接收到请求增加候选SN的消息，向网络设备101发送消息4，其中，消息4包括候选PSCell列表2中每个候选PSCell的标识和每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，上述请求增加候选SN的消息不包括网络设备101确定的候选PSCell的标识，所以候选PSCell列表2和候选PSCell列表1可能相同也可能不同，候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息用于指示候选PSCell的无线资源配置。网络设备101接收到消息4后，根据消息3和消息4确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell，为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及无线资源配置信息，并向终端103发送消息5，其中，消息5包括为终端103配置的候选PSCell的标识，为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及无线资源配置信息。终端103接收到消息5后，根据为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的变更条件，检测为终端103配置的候选PSCell的变更条件，并在检测到至少一个满足变更条件的候选PSCell的情况下，选择其中一个满足变更条件的候选PSCell(例如网络设备105为终端配置的候选PSCell)，应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置。后续，终端103与该候选PSCell发起随机接入，并在候选PSCell随机接入成功之后，与网络设备101和网络设备105建立了双连接。
其中，候选PSCell的添加条件用于终端确定是否添加该候选PSCell。例如，终端在检测到候选PSCell满足该候选PSCell的添加条件的情况下，终端确定应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置，并添加该候选PSCell。终端在检测到候选PSCell不满足该候 选PSCell的添加条件的情况下，终端确定不应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置，不添加该候选PSCell。
候选PSCell的变更条件用于终端确定是否将当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该候选PSCell。例如，终端在检测到候选PSCell满足该候选PSCell的变更条件的情况下，终端确定应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置，并将当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该候选PSCell，终端在检测到候选PSCell不满足该候选PSCell的变更条件的情况下，终端确定不应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置，并不将当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该候选PSCell。
一种可能的实现方式，候选PSCell的添加条件或变更条件(以下简称候选PSCell的添加/变更条件)包括候选PSCell的添加/变更条件的执行事件类型。该执行事件类型也可以称为测量事件或者上报事件等。终端可以测量该候选PSCell的信号质量，或者测量该候选PSCell的信号质量和该候选PSCell的邻区的信号质量，或者测量该候选PSCell的信号质量和当前与终端连接的PSCell的信号质量，并根据测量结果和该执行事件类型确定是否添加该候选PSCell，或者确定是否将当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该候选PSCell。
进一步的，该执行事件类型包括一个或多个事件或者多个不同配置的同一个事件，例如，该执行事件类型可以包括以下事件中的一种或多种：事件A3、事件A4、事件A5、事件B1、或事件B2。其中，事件A3表示邻区信号质量比特殊小区(special cell，SpCell)信号质量大于或等于一定的偏置(offset)。其中PCell和PSCell都统称为SpCell。事件A4表示邻区信号质量大于或等于一定门限。事件A5表示SpCell信号质量小于或等于门限1(threshold 1)，并且邻区信号质量大于或等于门限2(threshold 2)。事件B1表示跨无线接入技术(inter radio access technology，inter RAT)的邻区信号质量大于或等于一定的门限。事件B2表示PCell信号质量小于或等于门限3(threshold 3)，并且inter RAT的邻区信号质量大于或等于门限4(threshold 4)。上述事件仅是执行事件类型中事件的示例，执行事件类型还可以包括其他事件，不予限制。该执行事件类型还包括该执行事件类型中事件对应的门限值。该执行事件类型还包括满足该执行事件类型中事件的时间长度(timeToTrigger)，和/或，进入/离开该执行事件类型中事件时的迟滞值(hysteresis)等。其中，该执行事件类型中的事件可以对应一个或多个门限值，例如，事件A5对应两个门限值。该执行事件类型中的同一个事件可以对应不同的测量量，例如，事件A3可以对应A3参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power，RSRP)和A3参考信号接收质量(reference signal received quality，RSRQ)。其中，多个配置的同一个事件可以是指同一个事件对应不同的测量量，或者同一个事件中同一个测量量具有不同配置。当该执行事件类型包括多个事件或者多个配置的同一个事件时，当这些多个事件或多个配置的同一个事件都同时满足时，终端才认为检测到候选PSCell满足该候选PSCell的添加条件或变更条件。
对于上述示例1，候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息用于终端添加该候选PSCell后，与该候选PSCell通信。对于上述示例2，候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息用于终端将当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为该候选PSCell后，与该候选PSCell通信。
一种可能的实现方式，候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息包括以下信息中的至少一 项：候选PSCell为终端分配的随机接入资源，小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier，C-RNIT)，候选PSCell的全球小区识别码(cell global identification，CGI)，候选PSCell的物理小区标识(physical cell identifier，PCI)，候选PSCell对应的频率信息。
其中，候选PSCell对应的频率信息可以包括以下一种或多种：同步信号块的绝对频率(如absoluteFrequencySSB)、参考资源模块(common RB0)的绝对频率位置(如absoluteFrequencyPointA)、频率带宽列表(如frequencyBandList)、子载波间隔(sub-carrier spacing，SCS)特定的载波列表(如scs-SpecificCarrierList)等。
进一步的，候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息还包括候选PSCell对应的资源信息。候选PSCell对应的资源信息包括以下一种或多种：承载配置参数(radioBearerConfig)、小区组配置(cellGroupConfig)参数、物理(physical，PHY)层配置参数、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层配置参数、无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层配置参数、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层配置参数、服务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol，SDAP)层配置参数或RRC层配置参数。候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息也可以称为候选PSCell的无线资源配置等，不予限制。进一步的，候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息还包括候选PSCell对应的SCG中其他SCell的配置信息(比如SCell对应的物理层配置参数)。进一步的，候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息可能是一个RRC重配消息，该RRC重配消息中包括了以上信息。
一种可能的实现方式，一个候选PSCell对应的测量标识与该候选PSCell的添加/变更条件对应。例如，对于示例1，一个候选PSCell对应的测量标识与该候选PSCell的添加条件对应。对于示例2，一个候选PSCell对应的测量标识与该候选PSCell的变更条件对应。
进一步的，测量标识可以关联到测量对象标识(measObjectID)和测量上报配置标识(ReportConfigId)。其中，测量对象标识用于标识测量对象配置，该测量对象配置包括要测量的频点，或者测量对象配置包括测量标识对应的候选PSCell的频点。测量对象配置还可以包括如何根据小区中各个波束的参考信号的信号质量的测量结果获得小区的信号质量的测量结果等其他信息。测量上报配置标识用于标识测量上报配置，测量上报配置包括测量标识对应的候选PSCell的添加/变更条件。
一种可能的实现方式，候选PSCell对应的测量标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息可以关联到该候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识(ConReconfigID)，或者说一个条件重配置标识标识可以用来标识一个CPA配置或CPC配置，该CPA配置或CPC配置包括候选PSCell对应的测量标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。一个CPA配置或CPC配置也可以称为候选PSCell的条件PSCell添加/变更(conditional PSCell addition/change，CPAC)配置、候选PSCell的CPC配置、候选PSCell的CPA配置、候选PSCell的CPAC配置信息、候选PSCell的CPC配置信息或候选PSCell的CPA配置信息。可以理解的，不同候选PSCell对应的测量标识可以相同，也可以不同。不同候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识不同。因此，网络侧要修改候选PSCell的添加/变更条件，和/或，候选PSCell的无线资源配置信息，和/或取消候 选PSCell的配置(即终端无需进行该候选PSCell的添加/变更条件的判断)等信息的情况下，可以在向终端发送的消息中携带该候选PSCell的条件重配置标识，以便终端确定要修改的候选PSCell。
示例性的，候选PSCell 1、候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3对应的测量标识、条件重配置标识可以如下所示：候选PSCell 1对应的测量标识为measID 1，候选PSCell 1对应的条件重配置标识为ConReconfigID 1。候选PSCell 2对应的测量标识为measID 1，候选PSCell 1对应的条件重配置标识为ConReconfigID 2。候选PSCell 3对应的测量标识为measID 3，候选PSCell 1对应的条件重配置标识为ConReconfigID 3。
可选的，上述示例1中的消息2还包括条件重配置标识。上述示例2中的消息5中还包括条件重配置标识。
通过上述示例2可以看出，终端进行CPC的过程中，网络设备101会确定消息3，并向候选SN发送请求增加候选SN的消息。网络设备101还会接收来自候选SN的消息4。后续，网络设备101会根据消息3确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识，根据消息4确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，并向终端103发送消息5。也就是说，网络设备101需要通过候选PSCell的标识将候选PSCell对应的测量标识，以及候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，得到消息5中需要配置的信息，再向终端发送消息5，网络设备101的处理过程复杂。而且网络设备101在确定了消息3之后，才会收到消息4，所以网络设备101在收到消息4之前需要保存消息3中的信息，这需要网络设备101额外的内存来保存。
另外，由于候选PSCell列表1中的候选PSCell是MN确定的，候选PSCell列表2中的候选PSCell是候选SN确定的，在候选PSCell列表1包括候选PSCell列表2中没有的候选PSCell的情况下，网络设备101有可能无法确定出为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。示例性的，以候选PSCell列表1包括候选PSCell 1和候选PSCell 2，候选PSCell列表2包括候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3为例，若网络设备101确定的为终端103配置的候选PSCell为候选PSCell 1，而候选PSCell列表2中不包括候选PSCell 1，因此，网络设备101无法根据消息4确定候选PSCell 1对应的无线资源配置信息。
为了简化网络设备101的处理过程，以及为了解决网络设备101有可能无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法：MN向候选SN发送第一消息，第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。候选SN接收到第一消息后，向MN发送第二消息，第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。MN接收到第二消息后，向终端发送第三消息，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
上述过程中，MN会向候选SN发送第一消息，候选SN接收到第一消息后，可以根据第一候选PSCell列表确定第二候选PSCell列表，并向MN发送第二消息。如此， MN接收到第二消息后不需要确定为终端配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及无线资源配置信息，而是将候选SN确定的第二消息中的部分或全部内容发送给终端。因此，可以简化MN的处理过程，降低MN的开销。另外，在上述过程中，MN是将候选SN确定的第二消息中的部分或全部内容发送给终端，MN不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。该通信方法的具体介绍可以参考下述图3所示的方法。
上述示例2是MN触发CPC的情况，在具体应用中，源SN也可以触发CPC。具体的，可以参考下述示例3。
示例3，以终端103与网络设备101和网络设备102双连接，网络设备101为MN，网络设备102为终端对应的当前服务SN，网络设备102触发CPC为例进行介绍。网络设备102向网络设备101发送消息6，其中，消息6包括候选PSCell列表3中每个候选PSCell的标识和每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识。网络设备101接收到消息6后，向候选SN发送请求增加候选SN的消息。候选SN接收到请求增加候选SN的消息后，向网络设备101发送消息7，其中，消息7包括候选PSCell列表4中每个候选PSCell的标识和每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，候选PSCell列表4和候选PSCell列表3可能相同也可能不同，候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息用于指示候选PSCell的无线资源配置。网络设备101接收到消息7后，根据消息6和消息7确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell，为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及无线资源配置信息，并向终端103发送消息8，其中，消息8包括为终端103配置的候选PSCell的标识，为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及无线资源配置信息。终端103接收到消息8后，根据为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的变更条件，检测为终端103配置的候选PSCell的变更条件，并在检测到至少一个满足变更条件的候选PSCell的情况下，选择其中一个满足变更条件的候选PSCell(例如网络设备105为终端配置的候选PSCell)，应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置。后续，终端103与该候选PSCell发起随机接入，并在候选PSCell随机接入成功之后，与网络设备101和网络设备105建立了双连接。
通过上述示例3可以看出，终端进行CPC的过程中，网络设备101会接收来自网络设备102的消息6，网络设备101还会接收来自候选SN的消息7。后续，网络设备101会根据消息6确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识，根据消息7确定为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，并向终端103发送消息8。也就是说，网络设备101需要通过候选PSCell的标识将候选PSCell对应的测量标识，以及候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，得到消息8中需要配置的信息，再向终端发送消息8，网络设备101的处理过程复杂。而且网络设备101在接收到消息6之后，才会收到消息7，所以网络设备101在收到消息7之前需要保存消息6中的信息，这需要网络设备101额外的内存来保存。
另外，由于候选PSCell列表3中的候选PSCell是源SN确定的，候选PSCell列表4中的候选PSCell是候选SN确定的，在候选PSCell列表4包括候选PSCell列表3中没有的候选PSCell的情况下，网络设备101有可能无法确定出为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识。示例性的，以候选PSCell列表3包括候选PSCell 1和候 选PSCell 2，候选PSCell列表4包括候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3为例，因此，网络设备101无法根据消息7确定候选PSCell 3对应的测量标识。类似的，在候选PSCell列表3包括候选PSCell列表4中没有的候选PSCell的情况下，网络设备101有可能无法确定出为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
为了简化网络设备101的处理过程，以及为了解决网络设备101有可能无法确定出为终端103配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识或候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法：源SN向MN发送第四消息，第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。MN接收到第四消息后，向候选SN发送第一消息，第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识。可选的，第一消息中还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识。候选SN接收到第一消息后，向MN发送第二消息，第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。可选的，第二消息中还包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识。第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。MN接收到第二消息后，向终端发送第三消息，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
上述过程中，源SN会向MN发送第四消息，MN接收到第四消息会向候选SN发送第一消息，候选SN接收到第一消息后，可以根据第一候选PSCell列表确定第二候选PSCell列表，并向MN发送第二消息。由于MN是把源SN发送的第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识发送给候选SN，候选SN是根据第一候选列表中每个候选PSCell的标识来确定第二候选列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，并配置每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。从而MN可以从源SN发送的第一消息中找到第二候选列表中的每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，MN不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的测量标识或候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。进一步地，当第一消息和第二消息包括第一标识时，MN接收到第二消息后不需要确定为终端配置的候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及无线资源配置信息，而是将候选SN确定的第二消息中的部分或全部内容发送给终端。因此，可以简化MN的处理过程，降低MN的开销。该通信方法的具体介绍可以参考下述图4所示的方法。
图1所示的通信系统10仅用于举例，并非用于限制本申请的技术方案。本领域的技术人员应当明白，在具体实现过程中，通信系统10还可以包括其他设备，同时也可根据具体需要来确定网络设备和终端的数量，不予限制。
可选的，本申请实施例图1中的各网元，例如网络设备101、网络设备102、终端103、终端104或网络设备105，可以是一个装置内的一个功能模块。可以理解的是，该功能模块既可以是硬件设备中的元件，例如，终端或网络设备中的通信芯片或通信部件，也可以是在硬件上运行的软件功能模块，或者是平台(例如，云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能。
例如，图1中的各网元均可以通过图2中的通信装置20来实现。图2所示为可适 用于本申请实施例的通信装置的硬件结构示意图。该通信装置20包括至少一个处理器201和至少一个通信接口204，用于实现本申请实施例提供的方法。该通信装置20还可以包括通信线路202和存储器203。
处理器201可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，微处理器，特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，或一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。
通信线路202可包括一通路，在上述组件之间传送信息，例如总线。
通信接口204，用于与其他设备或通信网络通信。通信接口204可以是任何收发器一类的装置，如可以是以太网接口、无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)接口、无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)接口、收发器、管脚、总线、或收发电路等。
存储器203可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。存储器可以是独立存在，通过通信线路202与处理器201相耦合。存储器203也可以和处理器201集成在一起。本申请实施例提供的存储器通常可以具有非易失性。其中，存储器203用于存储执行本申请实施例提供的方案所涉及的计算机执行指令，并由处理器201来控制执行。处理器201用于执行存储器203中存储的计算机执行指令，从而实现本申请实施例提供的方法。
本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式，用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。
作为一种实施例，处理器201可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图2中的CPU0和CPU1。
作为一种实施例，通信装置20可以包括多个处理器，例如图2中的处理器201和处理器207。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器，也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
作为一种实施例，通信装置20还可以包括输出设备205和/或输入设备206。输出设备205和处理器201耦合，可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如，输出设备205可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display，LCD)，发光二级管(light emitting diode，LED)显示设备，阴极射线管(cathode ray tube，CRT)显示设备，或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备206和处理器201耦合，可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如，输入设备206可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。
上述的通信装置20可以是一个通用设备或者是一个专用设备。在具体实现中，通信装置20可以是台式机、便携式电脑、网络服务器、掌上电脑(personal digital assistant，PDA)、移动手机、平板电脑、无线终端设备、嵌入式设备、可穿戴设备或有图2中类似结构的设备。本申请实施例不限定通信装置20的类型。
下面结合图1和图2对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行具体阐述。
需要说明的是，本申请下述实施例中各个网元之间的消息名字或消息中各参数的名字等只是一个示例，具体实现中也可以是其他的名字，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，“/”可以表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系，例如，A/B可以表示A或B；“和/或”可以用于描述关联对象存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。
为了便于描述本申请实施例的技术方案，在本申请实施例中，可以采用“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能相同或相似的技术特征进行区分。该“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定，并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。在本申请实施例中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示例子、例证或说明，被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念，便于理解。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，对于一种技术特征，通过“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“A”、“B”、“C”和“D”等区分该种技术特征中的技术特征，该“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“A”、“B”、“C”和“D”描述的技术特征间无先后顺序或者大小顺序。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中同一个步骤或者具有相同功能的步骤或者技术特征在不同实施例之间可以互相参考借鉴。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中，网络设备和/或终端可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤，这些步骤仅是示例，本申请实施例还可以执行其它步骤或者各种步骤的变形。此外，各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行，并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部步骤。
在本申请实施例中，通信方法的执行主体的具体结构，本申请实施例并未特别限定，只要能够实现本申请实施例的提供的方法即可。例如，本申请实施例提供的通信方法的执行主体可以是MN，或者为应用于MN中的部件，例如，芯片，本申请对此不进行限定。或者，本申请实施例提供的通信方法的执行主体可以是候选SN，或者为应用于候选SN中的部件，例如，芯片，本申请对此不进行限定。或者，本申请实施例提供的通信方法的执行主体可以是源SN，或者为应用于源SN中的部件，例如，芯片，本申请对此不进行限定。或者，本申请实施例提供的通信方法的执行主体可以是终端，或者为应用于终端中的部件，例如，芯片，本申请对此不进行限定。下述实施例以通信方法的执行主体分别为MN、候选SN、源SN、终端为例进行描述。
如图3所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，该通信方法是以MN触发CPC 为例进行介绍的。该CPC可以是SN之间的CPC(inter-SN CPC)，也可以是SN内的CPC(intra-SN CPC)。其中，inter-SN CPC是指源SN与候选SN不同，源SN为当前与终端连接的SN。intra-SN CPC是指源SN与候选SN为同一个SN。该通信方法包括步骤301-步骤303。
步骤301：MN向候选SN发送第一消息。
其中，MN可以称为主节点、主基站等。MN可以为图1中的网络设备101或网络设备102。候选SN可以称为候选辅节点、候选辅基站等。候选SN可以为图1中的网络设备105。候选SN为MN为终端配置的。终端可以为图1中的终端103或终端104。
可以理解的，本申请不限制候选SN的数量。当候选SN为多个时，MN向每个候选SN发送第一消息。
其中，第一消息可以有以下两种情况：
情况1：第一消息可以包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识。
其中，第一候选PSCell列表包括MN为终端配置(或推荐)的至少一个候选PSCell。该至少一个候选PSCell为一个候选SN的小区。至少一个候选PSCell为MN检测到的信号质量较好的PSCell，或者为MN根据预设置的算法选择的PSCell。本申请实施例中，任一候选PSCell列表还可以称为候选PSCell集合，用于表示一个或多个候选PSCell。例如，第一候选PSCell列表包括候选PSCell 1、候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3。
第一标识为MN确定(或生成)的。第一标识用于指示第一标识对应的候选PSCell的变更条件，也就是说，第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
进一步的，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。测量标识和条件重配置标识的介绍可以参考图1中对应的描述，不予赘述。
示例性的，以第一候选PSCell列表包括候选PSCell 1、候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3为例，第一消息包括的内容可以如表1所示。表1所示的第一消息包括候选PSCell 1，候选PSCell 1对应的测量标识1，候选PSCell 1对应的条件重配置标识1，候选PSCell 2，候选PSCell 2对应的测量标识2，候选PSCell 2对应的条件重配置标识2，候选PSCell 3，候选PSCell 3对应的测量标识3，以及候选PSCell 3对应的条件重配置标识3。
表1
Figure PCTCN2020123017-appb-000001
情况2：第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识。进一步可选的，第一消息还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。测量标识和条件重配置标识为MN确定(或生成)的。
示例性的，以第一候选PSCell列表包括候选PSCell 1、候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3为例，第一消息包括的内容可以如表2所示。表2所示的第一消息包括候选PSCell 1，候选PSCell 1对应的测量标识1，候选PSCell 2，候选PSCell 2对应的测量标识2，候选PSCell 3，候选PSCell 3对应的测量标识3。
表2
候选PSCell的标识 候选PSCell对应的测量标识
候选PSCell 1 测量标识1
候选PSCell 2 测量标识2
候选PSCell 3 测量标识3
可以理解的，上述表1和表2仅是第一消息的示例，在实际应用中，第一消息还可以有其他的形式，例如，第一消息还可以通过集合的形式表示。第一消息也可以包括比表1或表2更多或更少的行，比表1或表2更多或更少的列，不予限制。以第一消息包括比表2更少的行为例，第一消息可以包括表2中的第一行，即第一消息包括候选PSCell 1，候选PSCell 1对应的测量标识1。
一种可能的实现方式，MN除了确定测量标识和/或条件重配置标识之外，还要确定测量标识关联的测量对象标识和测量上报配置标识。也就是说，MN还可以确定候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置和测量上报配置。测量对象配置和测量上报配置的介绍可以参考上述图1中对应的描述，不予赘述。
进一步的，MN可以在步骤303之前，向终端发送第七消息。第七消息用于指示测量标识，与该测量标识关联的测量对象标识和测量上报配置标识以便终端接收到第七消息后，根据第七消息确定该测量标识对应的测量对象配置以及测量上报配置。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息还包括第二指示信息，以便候选SN确定MN触发了条件PSCell变更。第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，MN向源SN发送第二指示信息，以便源SN确定MN触发了条件PSCell变更。源SN接收到第二指示信息后，可以向MN发送确认信息，该确认信息用于指示接受MN触发的条件PSCell变更。
一种可能是实现方式，上述第一消息为RRC消息。第一消息还可以称为SN增加请求(SN add request)消息。
对应的，候选SN接收来自MN的第一消息。
步骤302：候选SN根据第一消息向MN发送第二消息。
其中，第二消息还可以称为SN增加响应消息。
对于上述情况1，第二消息可以包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。其中，候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的介绍可以参考上述图1中对应的描述，不予赘述。
对于上述情况2，第二消息可以包括第一信息。第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。可选的，第一信息还可以包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件配置标识。可以理解的，若在上述情况2中，第一消息不包括 第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，第二消息包括的第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识为候选SN确定(或生成)的。
一种可能的实现方式，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。也就是说，候选SN是将第一候选PSCell列表中的全部或部分候选PSCell确定为第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell。
示例性的，以第一候选PSCell列表包括候选PSCell 1、候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3为例，第二候选PSCell列表可以包括候选PSCell 1、候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3。或者，第二候选PSCell列表可以包括候选PSCell 1和候选PSCell 2。或者，第二候选PSCell列表可以包括候选PSCell 1和候选PSCell 3。或者，第二候选PSCell列表可以包括候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3。或者，第二候选PSCell列表可以包括候选PSCell 1。或者，第二候选PSCell列表可以包括候选PSCell 2。或者，第二候选PSCell列表可以包括候选PSCell 3。
可以理解的，候选SN可以将第一候选PSCell列表中信号质量好的候选PSCell确定为第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell。或者，候选SN可以随机将第一候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell确定为第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell。
示例性的，以第一消息包括的内容如表1所示，第二候选PSCell列表包括候选PSCell 2和候选PSCell 3为例，第二消息包括的内容可以如表3所示。表3所示的第二消息包括候选PSCell 2，候选PSCell 2对应的测量标识2，候选PSCell 2对应的条件重配置标识2，候选PSCell 3，候选PSCell 3对应的测量标识3，以及候选PSCell 3对应的条件重配置标识3。
表3
Figure PCTCN2020123017-appb-000002
可以理解的，表3仅是第二消息的示例，在实际应用中，第二消息还可以有其他的形式，例如，第二消息还可以通过集合的形式表示。第二消息也可以包括比表3更多或更少的行，比表3更多或更少的列，不予限制。以第二消息包括比表3更少的行为例，第二消息可以包括表3中的第一行，即第二消息包括候选PSCell 2，候选PSCell 2对应的测量标识2，候选PSCell 2对应的条件重配置标识2。
可以理解的，在第一候选PSCell列表包括一个候选PSCell，候选SN确定选择该候选PSCell的情况下，第二消息包括该候选PSCell的标识，该候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。在第一候选PSCell列表包括一个候选PSCell，候选SN确定不选择该候选PSCell的情况下，候选SN不发送第二消息，或者候选SN发送第二消息，该第二消息用于指示候选SN确定不选择该候选PSCell。
可以理解的，在第一候选PSCell列表包括一个候选PSCell，候选SN确定不选择该候选PSCell的情况下，候选SN可以在接收到多个第一消息后，向MN发送一个第二消息，该第二消息用于指示候选SN确定不选择上述多个第一消息中指示的候选 PSCell。
一种可能的实现方式，第一信息为RRC重配置(RRCReconfiguration)消息。
对应的，MN接收来自候选SN的第二消息。
步骤303：MN向终端发送第三消息。
对于上述情况1：第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。在这种情况下，MN接收到第二消息后，获取第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，并向终端发送第三消息。
对于上述情况2：若第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，第三消息包括第一信息。在这种情况下，MN可以不感知第一信息，也就是说，MN不解析第一信息。MN接收到第二消息后，直接将第二消息中的第一信息包括在第三消息中发送给终端。如此，MN使用常规技术就可以向终端发送第三消息，而不需要增加新的信元来指示第一信息。例如，第一信息是候选SN生成的RRC重配消息，MN生成一个RRC重配消息，该MN生成的RRC重配消息中包含了候选SN生成的RRC重配消息。若第一信息不包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。其中，第三消息中包括的第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识为MN确定(或生成)的。
可以理解的，第三消息中的候选PSCell的标识可以包括在候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息中。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第二指示信息。可以理解的，MN可能触发CPC，源SN也可能触发CPC。在MN触发的CPC中，测量标识/条件重配置标识可以是MN确定(或生成)的，在源SN触发的CPC中，测量标识/条件重配置标识可以是源SN确定(或生成)的，MN确定的测量标识/条件重配置标识对应的测量对象配置和测量上报配置，与源SN确定的测量标识/条件重配置标识对应的测量对象配置和测量上报配置可能不同。若第三消息不包括第二指示信息，终端接收到第三消息后，并不知道第三消息中的测量标识为MN确定的，还是源SN确定的，终端也就无法根据测量标识/条件重配置标识确定测量对象配置和测量上报配置。
可以理解的，MN向终端发送第二指示信息的方法除了应用于本申请的方法中之外，也可以应用于常规技术中，以便终端根据第二指示信息确定MN发送给终端的测量标识是MN确定的，还是源SN确定的。例如，上述示例2中的消息5中也可以包括该第二指示信息。可选的，上述示例2中的消息3和/或消息4也可以包括该第二指示信息。
进一步的，第二指示信息可以通过一个信元来指示。示例性的，第二指示信息可以通过信元的名称或信元的取值来指示。比如，以信元1用于指示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的，信元2用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的为例，若第三消息包括信元1，则表示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的，若第三消息包括信元2，则表 示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的。又比如，以第三消息包括信元3，信元3的取值用于指示条件PSCell的变更是由MN触发的还是源SN触发的为例，若信元3的取值为0，则表示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的，若信元3的取值为1，则表示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的，反之亦然。又比如，在第三消息包括信元4的情况下，表示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的，在第三消息不包括信元4的情况下，表示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的。第二指示信息除了通过信元的名称或信元的取值来指示之外，还可以是通过choice结构来指示。choice结构的介绍可以参考常规技术中的解释说明，不予赘述。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息为RRC消息。
对应的，终端接收来自MN的第三消息。
可选的，终端接收到第三消息，向MN发送第五消息。
其中一种情况，第五消息用于向MN指示终端接收到该第三消息。可以理解的，第五消息不包括终端向源SN和/或候选SN发送的消息。MN接收到第五消息后，可以根据第五消息确定第六消息，并向第一SN发送第六消息。第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息或者指示终端接收到CPA配置或CPC配置。第一SN包括源SN与候选SN中的至少一个SN。
其中另一种情况，第五消息用于指示终端接收到该第三消息。第五消息包括终端向第一SN发送的消息。MN接收到第五消息后，向第一SN转发终端向第一SN发送的消息。
一种可能的实现方式，终端接收到第三消息后，根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。进一步的，终端接收到第三消息后，根据第三消息确定第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的测量对象配置和测量上报配置。终端还检测每个候选PSCell对应的测量上报配置指示的变更条件，并在检测到至少一个满足变更条件的候选PSCell的情况下，选择其中一个候选PSCell，应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置。
进一步的，终端根据第三消息确定第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的测量对象配置和测量上报配置，包括：若第三消息包括第一标识，第一标识包括测量标识，或者第一标识包括测量标识和条件重配置标识，终端根据测量标识确定第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的测量对象配置和测量上报配置。若第三消息包括第一标识，第一标识包括条件重配置标识，终端根据条件重配置标识确定该条件重配置标识对应的测量标识，根据测量标识确定第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的测量对象配置和测量上报配置。若第三消息包括第一信息，终端根据测量标识确定第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的测量对象配置和测量上报配置。
一种可能的实现方式，终端接收到第三消息后，源SN或候选SN触发释放第二候选PSCell列表中，候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息。如此，可以节省源SN、候选SN以及终端的存储开销，也可以提高资源的利用率，使得源SN或候选SN将释放的资源配置给其他终端。
示例性的，以源SN触发释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell为第二候选PSCell列表中任意一个或多个候选PSCell为例，源SN向MN发送第八消息，第八消息用于指示释放 第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息，第八消息包括第一候选PSCell的标识和/或第一候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。MN接收到第八消息后，向终端发送第九消息，向候选SN发送第十消息，第九消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息，第十消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
示例性的，以候选SN触发释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息为例，候选SN向MN发送第十一消息。其中，第十一消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息，第十一消息包括第一候选PSCell的标识，和/或，第一候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，或者第十一消息包括第一候选PSCell的索引。MN接收到第十一消息后，根据第十一消息的内容，MN能够确定需要释放第一候选PSCell的CPC配置，向终端发送第十二消息，向源SN发送第十三消息，第十二消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息，第十三消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置。可以理解的，若上述第十一消息中包括第一候选PSCell的索引，则上述第一消息中也包括该第一候选PSCell的索引。在这种情况下，候选SN需要释放第一候选PSCell对应的CPC配置时，候选SN把第一候选PSCell的索引发送给MN即可。
示例性的，以MN触发释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息为例，MN向候选SN发送第十四消息。其中，第十四消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第十四消息包括第一候选PSCell的标识和/或第一候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，或者第十四消息包括第一候选PSCell的索引。MN向终端发送第十五消息，向源SN发送第十六消息，第十五消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息，第十六消息用于指示释放第一候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置。
可以理解的，若上述第十四消息中包括第一候选PSCell的索引，则上述第一消息中也包括该第一候选PSCell的索引。在这种情况下，MN需要释放第一候选PSCell对应的CPC配置时，MN把第一候选PSCell的索引发送给候选SN即可。
一种可能的实现方式，终端接收到第三消息之后，终端根据候选PSCell的变更条件进行判断候选PSCell是否满足变更条件。当至少一个PSCell的变更条件得到满足时，选择其中一个满足条件的候选PSCell，应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置。后续，终端可以向MN发送一个消息，该消息中携带了一个指示信息，该指示信息包括终端选择的候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，或终端选择的候选PSCell的标识，应理解，候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识与候选PSCell的标识相比，所需的比特数更少，因此，相比于该指示信息包括终端选择的候选PSCell的标识的情况，该指示信息包括终端选择的候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识的情况下，更节省信令开销。MN接收到上述一个消息后，可以根据该指示信息确定终端选择的候选PSCell。
进一步，MN可以根据终端选择的候选PSCell，向候选PSCell对应的SN发送一个消息，该消息用于通知候选PSCell对应的SN，终端已经选择了该SN中的候选PSCell或该SN中的候选PSCell满足了条件PSCell变更条件。在终端选择了候选PSCell之后，终端与该候选PSCell发起随机接入，并在候选PSCell随机接入成功之后，与MN和该候选PSCell对应的SN建立了双连接。可以理解的，本申请实施例不限制第一消息、第二消息或第三消息的数量。也就是说，MN可以向候选SN发送多条第一消息，候选SN也可以向MN发送多条第二消息，MN还可以向终端发送多条第三消息。以MN向终端发送多条第三消息为例，每条第三消息对应一个候选SN的一个或多个候选PSCell的相关信息(例如，一个或多个候选PSCell的标识、一个或多个候选PSCell对应的第一标识、以及一个或多个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息)。可以理解的，若MN向终端发送一条第三消息，该第三消息可以包括多个候选SN中，每个候选SN的候选PSCell的相关信息。
基于图3所示的方法，MN可以确定第一消息，并向候选SN发送第一消息。候选SN接收到第一消息后，可以在第一候选PSCell列表中选择候选PSCell(即第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell)，并向MN发送第二消息。MN接收到第二消息后，将第二消息中的全部或部分消息包括在第三消息中发送给终端，以便终端根据第三消息进行CPC。一方面，MN不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第一消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识)，节省了MN的存储开销。MN也不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的第一标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了MN的处理过程，降低了NM的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另一方面，第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell是从第一候选PSCell列表中选择处理的，MN接收到第二消息后，是将第二消息中的全部或部分内容包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的问题。
上述图3所示的方法是以MN触发CPC为例进行介绍的，下面以源SN触发CPC为例介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法。
如图4所示，为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法。该通信方法是以源SN触发CPC为例介绍的。该CPC可以是SN之间的CPC(inter-SN CPC)，也可以是SN内的CPC(intra-SN CPC)。该通信方法包括步骤401-步骤404。
步骤401：源SN向MN发送第四消息。
其中，源SN可以称为源辅节点，源辅基站等。源SN为当前与终端已经建立连接的SN。源SN可以为图1中的网络设备101或网络设备102。终端可以为图1中的终端103或终端104。
MN可以称为主节点、主基站等。若源SN为图1中的网络设备101，则MN可以为图1中的网络设备102，若源SN为图1中的网络设备102，则MN可以为图1中的网络设备101。
一种可能的实现方式，源SN确定第四消息，并向MN发送第四消息。其中，第四消息还可以称为SN变更请求(SN change required)消息。第四消息可以有以下两 种情况：
情况3：第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识。
其中，第一候选PSCell列表包括源SN为终端配置(或推荐)的至少一个候选PSCell。该至少一个候选PSCell为一个候选SN的小区，也可以为多个候选SN的小区。候选SN为源SN为终端配置的。本申请不限制候选SN的数量。候选SN可以为图1中的网络设备105。第一标识的介绍可以参考上述图3所示方法中对应的描述，不同的是，图4所示方法中的第一标识是源SN确定(或生成)的。
进一步的，至少一个候选PSCell为源SN检测到的信号质量较好的PSCell，或者为源SN根据预设置的算法选择的PSCell。本申请实施例中，任一候选PSCell列表还可以称为候选PSCell集合，用于表示一个或多个候选PSCell。
情况4：第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识。进一步可选的，第四消息还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。测量标识和条件重配置标识为源SN确定(或生成)的。
一种可能的实现方式，源SN除了确定测量标识和/或条件重配置标识之外，还要确定测量标识关联的测量对象标识和测量上报配置标识。也就是说，源SN还可以确定候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置和测量上报配置。测量对象配置和测量上报配置的介绍可以参考上述图1中对应的描述，不予赘述。
进一步的，源SN可以在步骤303之前，直接向终端发送第十七消息，或者通过MN向终端发送第十七消息。第十七消息用于指示测量标识，与该测量标识关联的测量对象标识和测量上报配置标识，以便终端接收到第十三消息后，根据第十三消息确定该测量标识对应的测量对象配置以及测量上报配置。
一种可能的实现方式，第四消息还包括第一指示信息，以便MN确定源SN触发了条件PSCell变更。第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的。
对应的，MN接收来自源SN的第四消息。
步骤402：MN向候选SN发送第一消息。
可以理解的，当候选SN为多个时，MN向每个候选SN发送第一消息。第一消息还可以称为SN增加请求(SN add request)消息。
对于上述情况3，第一消息有以下两种情况：
情况3.1：第一消息可以包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识。
情况3.2：第一消息可以包括第一候选PSCell列表中中部分候选PSCell的标识，以及这些候选PSCell对应的第一标识。
对于上述情况4，第一消息有以下三种情况：
情况4.1：第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识。进一步可选的，第一消息还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
情况4.2：第一消息中可以包括第一候选PSCell列表中中部分候选PSCell的标识， 以及这些候选PSCell对应的测量标识。进一步可选的，第一消息还包括这些候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
情况4.3：第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中部分或全部的候选PSCell的标识。进一步可选的，第一消息还包括这些候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息还包括第一指示信息，以便候选SN确定源SN触发了条件PSCell变更。
对应的，候选SN接收来自MN的第一消息。
步骤403：候选SN根据第一消息向MN发送第二消息。
其中，第二消息还可以称为SN增加响应消息。
对于上述情况3.1和情况3.2，第二消息可以包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。其中，候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的介绍可以参考上述图1中对应的描述，不予赘述。
对于上述情况4.1和情况4.2，第二消息可以包括第一信息。第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。可选的，第一信息还可以包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件配置标识。
对于上述情况4.3，第二消息可以包括第一信息。第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。可选的，第一信息还可以包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件配置标识。
其中，第二消息、第二候选PSCell列表以及第一候选PSCell列表的介绍可以参考上述图3所示方法中对应的描述，不予赘述。
一种可能的实现方式，第一信息为RRC重配置(RRCReconfiguration)消息。
对应的，MN接收来自候选SN的第二消息。
步骤404：MN向终端发送第三消息。
对于上述情况3.1和情况3.2：第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。在这种情况下，MN接收到第二消息后，获取第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，并向终端发送第三消息。
对于上述情况4.1和情况4.2：若第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，第三消息包括第一信息。在这种情况下，MN可以不感知第一信息，也就是说，MN不解析第一信息。MN接收到第二消息后，直接将第二消息中的第一信息包括在第三消息中发送给终端。如此，MN使用常规技术就可以向终端发送第三消息，而不需要增加新的信元来指示第一信息。例如，第一信息是候选SN生成的RRC重配消息，MN生成一个RRC重配消息，该MN生成的RRC重配消息中包含了SN生成的RRC重配消息。若第一信息不包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置 标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。其中，第三消息中包括的第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的为MN确定(或生成)的。
对于上述情况4.3：第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。MN根据第三消息中的每个候选PSCell的标识可以从第四消息中找到该候选PSCell对应的测量标识。进一步的，如果第四消息中第一候选PSCell列表中还包括每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，MN还可以从第四消息中找到第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。如果第四消息中第一候选PSCell列表中不包括每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，则MN可以为第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell生成一个条件重配置标识，或者第二候选PSCell列表中包括了每个候选PSCell的条件重配置标识。根据以上方法，MN可以获得第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，之后MN向终端设备发送第三消息，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
可以理解的，第三消息中的候选PSCell的标识可以包括在候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息中。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第一指示信息。可以理解的，MN可能触发CPC，源SN也可能触发CPC。在MN触发的CPC中，测量标识/条件重配置标识可以是MN确定(或生成)的，在源SN触发的CPC中，测量标识/条件重配置标识是源SN确定(或生成)的。MN确定的测量标识/条件重配置标识对应的测量对象配置和测量上报配置，与源SN确定的测量标识/条件重配置标识对应的测量对象配置和测量上报配置可能不同。若第三消息不包括第一指示信息，终端接收到第三消息后，并不知道第三消息中的测量标识为MN确定的，还是源SN确定的，终端也就无法根据测量标识/条件重配置标识确定测量对象配置和测量上报配置。
可以理解的，MN向终端发送第一指示信息的方法除了应用于本申请的方法中之外，也可以应用于常规技术中，以便终端根据第一指示信息确定MN发送给终端的测量标识是MN确定的，还是源SN确定的，从而终端可以根据第一指示信息确定测量标识对应的候选PSCell变更条件是MN配置的，还是SN配置的，终端根据MN或SN配置的该测量标识对应的测量对象配置和测量上报配置进行候选PSCell变更条件判断。例如，上述示例3中的消息8中也可以包括该第一指示信息。可选的，上述示例3中的消息6和/或消息7也可以包括该第一指示信息。
进一步的，第一指示信息可以通过一个信元来指示。示例性的，第一指示信息可以通过信元的名称或信元的取值来指示。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息为RRC消息。
对应的，终端接收来自MN的第三消息。
终端接收到第三消息后的介绍可以参考上述图3所示方法中对应的描述，不予赘述。
可以理解的，本申请实施例不限制第一消息、第二消息、第三消息或第四消息的 数量。也就是说，源SN可以向MN发送多条第四消息，MN也可以向候选SN发送多条第一消息，候选SN也可以向MN发送多条第二消息，MN还可以向终端发送多条第三消息。以源SN向MN发送多条第四消息为例，每条第四消息对应一个候选SN的一个或多个候选PSCell的相关信息(例如，一个或多个候选PSCell的标识，和一个或多个候选PSCell对应的第一标识)。可以理解的，若源SN向MN发送一条第四消息，该第四消息可以包括多个候选SN中，每个候选SN的候选PSCell的相关信息。
基于图4所示的方法，MN可以接收来自源SN的第四消息，根据第四消息向候选SN发送第一消息。候选SN接收到第一消息后，可以在第一候选PSCell列表中选择候选PSCell(即第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell)，并向MN发送第二消息。MN接收到第二消息后，将第二消息中的全部或部分消息包括在第三消息中发送给终端，以便终端根据第三消息进行CPC。一方面，MN不需要存储候选PSCell对应的第四消息中的相关信息(比如第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识)，节省了MN的存储开销。MN也不需要根据第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell的标识将该候选PSCell对应的第一标识和该候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息关联起来，简化了MN的处理过程，降低了NM的开销，缩短了终端进行CPC的时间。另一方面，第二候选PSCell列表中的候选PSCell是从第一候选PSCell列表中选择处理的，MN接收到第二消息后，是将第二消息中的全部或部分内容包括在第三消息中发送给终端的，不会出现无法确定候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，或者候选PSCell对应的测量标识的问题。
上述图3所示的方法是以MN触发CPC为例介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法的，上述图4所示的方法是以源SN触发CPC为例介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法的。在上述图3或图4所示的方法中，终端接收到来自MN的第三消息后，还可以向MN发送第五消息，第五消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息。类似的，在进行CPA的过程中，终端接收到来自MN的用于指示候选PSCell的添加条件和配置的消息1后，也可以向MN发送用于指示接收到该消息1的消息2。下面介绍终端接收到来自MN的用于指示候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和配置的消息后，终端的处理方法。
如图5所示，为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法。该通信方法可以应用于MN触发的条件PSCell添加/变更的情况下，或者，该通信方法可以应用于源SN触发的inter-SN CPC，或者，该通信方法可以应用于源SN触发的intra-SN CPC。该通信方法包括步骤501-步骤503。
步骤501：MN向终端发送第一消息。
其中，MN可以称为主节点或主基站等。MN可以为图1中的网络设备101或网络设备102。终端可以为图1中的终端103或终端104。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置。候选PSCell列表包括MN或源SN为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。该至少一个候选PSCell为一个候选SN的小区，也可以为多个候选SN的小区。
其中，候选SN为源SN或MN为终端配置的。本申请不限制候选SN的数量。候选SN可以为图1中的网络设备105。候选SN可以称为候选辅节点或候选辅基站等。
其中，源SN可以称为源辅节点或源辅基站等。源SN为当前与终端连接的SN。若MN为图1中的网络设备101，源SN可以为图1中的网络设备102；若MN为图1中的网络设备102，源SN可以为图1中的网络设备101。
示例性的，第一消息包括候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识和每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。其中，候选PSCell对应的第一标识以及候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息的介绍，可以参考上述图3所示方法中对应的描述，不予赘述。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息还包括第一指示信息。第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息为RRC消息。
对应的，终端接收来自MN的第一消息。
一种可能的实现方式，终端接收到第一消息之后，终端根据候选PSCell的添加条件或变更条件进行判断终端设备是否满足条件。当至少一个PSCell的添加条件或变更条件得到满足时，选择其中一个满足条件的候选PSCell，应用该候选PSCell的无线资源配置。后续，终端可以向MN发送一个消息，该消息中携带了一个指示信息，该指示信息包括终端选择的候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，或终端选择的候选PSCell的标识，应理解，候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识与候选PSCell的标识相比，所需的比特数更少，因此，相比于该指示信息包括终端选择的候选PSCell的标识的情况，该指示信息包括终端选择的候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识的情况下，更节省信令开销。MN接收到上述一个消息后，可以根据该指示信息确定终端选择的候选PSCell。
进一步，MN可以根据终端选择的候选PSCell，向候选PSCell对应的SN发送一个消息，该消息用于通知候选PSCell对应的SN，终端已经选择了该SN中的候选PSCell或该SN中的候选PSCell满足了条件PSCell变更条件。在终端选择了候选PSCell之后，终端与该候选PSCell发起随机接入，并在候选PSCell随机接入成功之后，与MN和该候选PSCell对应的SN建立了双连接。步骤502：终端向MN发送第二消息。
一种可能的实现方式，终端检测到至少一个满足添加/变更条件的候选PSCell的情况下，向MN发送第二消息。其中，第二消息有以下两种情况：
情况5：第二消息用于向MN指示终端接收到第一消息。可以理解的，第二消息不包括终端向源SN和/或候选SN发送的消息。
情况6：第二消息用于指示终端接收到该第一消息。第二消息包括终端向第一SN发送的消息。
一种可能的实现方式，第二消息为RRC消息。
对应的，MN接收来自终端的第二消息。
步骤503：MN根据第二消息向第一SN发送第三消息。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一SN为MN为终端确定的候选SN中的至少一个。在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的变更条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一SN为MN或源SN为终端确定的候选SN以及源SN中的至少一个。
对于上述情况5，MN接收到第二消息后，可以根据第二消息确定第三消息，并向 第一SN发送第三消息。第三消息用于指示终端接收到第一消息或者指示终端接收到CPA配置或CPC配置。
对于上述情况6：MN接收到第二消息后，向第一SN转发终端向第一SN发送的消息。
对应的，第一SN接收来自MN的第三消息。第一SN接收到第三消息后，可以根据第三消息确定终端接收到第一消息或者确定终端接收到CPA配置或CPC配置。
可以理解的，第三消息中的候选PSCell的标识可以包括在候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息中。
一种可能的实现方式，第一SN接收到第三消息后，触发释放候选PSCell列表中候选PSCell对应的测量对象配置，和/或，测量上报配置，和/或，无线资源配置信息。具体的，可以参考上述图3所示方法中对应的描述，不予赘述。
基于图5所示的方法，终端在接收到用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置的第一消息后，可以向MN发送第二消息，该第二消息中可以不包括终端向第一SN发送的消息。MN接收到第二消息后，可以根据第二消息确定(或生成)第三消息，并向第一SN发送第三消息，以便第一SN确定终端接收到第一消息。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，上述MN、候选SN、源SN或终端等为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法操作，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对MN、候选SN、源SN或终端进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。
比如，以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下，图6示出了一种通信装置60的结构示意图。通信装置60包括收发模块601。
示例性地，通信装置60可以用于实现MN的功能。通信装置60例如为图3所示的实施例或图4所示的实施例所述的MN。
示例性地，通信装置60可以是MN，也可以是应用于MN中的芯片或者其他具有上述MN功能的组合器件、或部件等。当通信装置60是MN时，收发模块601可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等。当通信装置60是具有上述MN功能的部件时，收发模块601可以是射频单元。当通信装置60是芯片系统时，收发模块601可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口。应理解，本申请实施例中的收发模块601可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，收发模块601可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由MN所执行的全部收发 操作，例如步骤301，步骤302，步骤303，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，收发模块601可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由MN所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤401，步骤402，步骤403，步骤404，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，收发模块601，用于向候选SN发送第一消息，第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
收发模块601，还用于接收来自候选SN的第二消息，第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。
收发模块601，还用于向终端发送第三消息，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块601，还用于接收来自源SN的第四消息，第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，第一候选PSCell列表包括源SN为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，第一候选PSCell列表包括通信装置60为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，第一标识为通信装置60确定的。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由通信装置60触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块601，还用于接收来自终端的第五消息，第五消息用于向通信装置60指示终端接收到第三消息；收发模块601，还用于根据第五消息向第一SN发送第六消息，第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息，第一SN包括源SN与候选SN中的至少一个SN。
或者，收发模块601，用于向候选SN发送第一消息，第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识。
收发模块601，用于接收来自候选SN的第二消息，第二消息包括第一信息，第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。
收发模块601，用于向终端发送第三消息，第三消息包括第一信息。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块601，还用于接收来自源SN的第四消息，第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，第一候选PSCell列表包括源SN为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell 对应的条件重配置标识，第四消息还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，第一候选PSCell列表包括通信装置60为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，测量标识为通信装置60确定的。
一种可能的实现方式，第三消息还包括第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由通信装置60触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块601，还用于接收来自终端的第五消息，第五消息用于向通信装置60指示终端接收到第三消息；收发模块601，还用于根据第五消息向第一SN发送第六消息，第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息，第一SN包括源SN与候选SN中的至少一个SN。
当通信装置60用于实现MN的功能时，关于通信装置60所能实现的其他功能，可参考图3所示的实施例，或图4所示的方法实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
比如，以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下，图7示出了一种通信装置70的结构示意图。通信装置70包括收发模块701。
示例性地，通信装置70可以用于实现候选SN的功能。通信装置70例如为图3所示的实施例或图4所示的实施例所述的候选SN。
示例性地，通信装置70可以是候选SN，也可以是应用于候选SN中的芯片或者其他具有上述候选SN功能的组合器件、或部件等。当通信装置70是候选SN时，收发模块701可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等。当通信装置70是具有上述候选SN功能的部件时，收发模块701可以是射频单元。当通信装置70是芯片系统时，收发模块701可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口。应理解，本申请实施例中的收发模块701可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，收发模块701可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由候选SN所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤301，步骤302，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，收发模块701可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由候选SN所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤402，步骤403，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，收发模块701，用于接收来自MN的第一消息，第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
收发模块701，还用于根据第一消息向MN发送第二消息，第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块701，还用于接收来自MN的第六消息，第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息，第三消息为MN发送给终端的消息，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识， 以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
或者，收发模块701，用于接收来自MN的第一消息，第一消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识。
收发模块701，还用于根据第一消息向MN发送第二消息，第二消息包括第一信息，第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。
一种可能的实现方式，第一消息还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块701，还用于接收来自MN的第六消息，第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息，第三消息为MN发送给终端的消息，第三消息包括第一信息。
当通信装置70用于实现候选SN的功能时，关于通信装置70所能实现的其他功能，可参考图3所示的实施例，或图4所示的方法实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
比如，以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下，图8示出了一种通信装置80的结构示意图。通信装置80包括处理模块801和收发模块802。
示例性地，通信装置80用于实现源辅节点的功能。通信装置80例如为图4所示的实施例所述的源辅节点。
示例性地，通信装置80可以是源辅节点，也可以是应用于源辅节点中的芯片或者其他具有上述源辅节点功能的组合器件、或部件等。当通信装置80是源辅节点时，处理模块801可以是处理器(或者，处理电路)，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。收发模块802可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等。当通信装置80是具有上述源辅节点功能的部件时，处理模块801可以是处理器(或者，处理电路)，例如基带处理器。收发模块802可以是射频单元。当通信装置80是芯片系统时，处理模块801可以是芯片系统的处理器(或者，处理电路)，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。收发模块802可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口。应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块801可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件(或者，称为处理电路)实现，收发模块802可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，处理模块801可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由源辅节点所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如确定第四消息，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块802可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由源辅节点所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤401，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，处理模块801，用于确定第四消息，第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，第一候选PSCell列表包括通信装置80为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件。
收发模块802，用于向MN发送第四消息。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由通信装置80触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块802，还用于接收来自MN的第六消息，第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息，第三消息为MN发送给终端的消息，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。
或者，处理模块801，用于确定第四消息，第四消息包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，第一候选PSCell列表包括通信装置80为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。
收发模块802，用于向MN发送第四消息。
一种可能的实现方式，第四消息还包括第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由通信装置80触发的。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块802，还用于接收来自MN的第六消息，第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息，第三消息为MN发送给终端的消息，第三消息包括第一信息，第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，第一候选PSCell列表包括第二候选PSCell列表。
当通信装置80用于实现源SN的功能时，关于通信装置80所能实现的其他功能，可参考图4所示的方法实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
比如，以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下，图9示出了一种通信装置90的结构示意图。示例性地，通信装置90用于实现终端的功能。通信装置90例如为图3所示的实施例，或图4所示的实施例所述的终端。
通信装置90包括收发模块901和处理模块902。示例性地，通信装置90可以是终端，也可以是应用于终端中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端功能的组合器件、或部件等。当通信装置90是终端时，收发模块901可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块902可以是处理器(或者，处理电路)，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当通信装置90是具有上述终端功能的部件时，收发模块901可以是射频单元，处理模块902可以是处理器(或者，处理电路)，例如基带处理器。当通信装置90是芯片系统时，收发模块901可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口，处理模块902可以是芯片系统的处理器(或者，处理电路)，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解，本申请实施例中的收发模块901可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现，处理模块902可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件(或者，称为处理电路)实现。
例如，收发模块901可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由终端所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤303，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理模块902可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由终端所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如 根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，收发模块901可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤404，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理模块902可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，收发模块901，用于接收来自MN的第三消息，第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，第一候选PSCell列表包括源SN或MN为通信装置90配置的至少一个候选PSCell，第一标识用于指示当前与通信装置90连接的PSCell为第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件，源SN为当前与通信装置90建立连接的SN，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的。
处理模块902，用于根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
一种可能的实现方式，第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块901，还用于向MN发送第五消息，第五消息用于向MN指示通信装置90接收到第三消息。
或者，收发模块901，用于接收来自MN的第三消息，第三消息包括第一信息，第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，第一候选PSCell列表包括源SN或MN为通信装置90配置的至少一个候选PSCell，源SN为当前与通信装置90建立连接的SN，第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由源SN触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由MN触发的。
处理模块902，用于根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
一种可能的实现方式，收发模块901，还用于向MN发送第五消息，第五消息用于向MN指示通信装置90接收到第三消息。
当通信装置90用于实现终端的功能时，关于通信装置90所能实现的其他功能，可参考图3所示的实施例，或者图4所示的方法实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
比如，以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下，图10示出了一种通信装置100的结构示意图。通信装置100包括收发模块1001。
示例性地，通信装置100可以用于实现MN的功能。通信装置100例如为图5所示的实施例所述的MN。
示例性地，通信装置100可以是MN，也可以是应用于MN中的芯片或者其他具有上述MN功能的组合器件、或部件等。当通信装置100是MN时，收发模块1001可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等。当通信装置100是具有上述MN功能的部件时，收发模块1001可以是射频单元。当通信装置100是芯片系统时，收发模块1001可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口。应理解，本申请实施例中的 收发模块1001可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，收发模块1001可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由MN所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤501，步骤502，步骤503，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，收发模块1001，用于向终端发送第一消息，第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置。
收发模块1001，还用于接收来自终端的第二消息，第二消息用于向通信装置100指示终端接收到第一消息。
收发模块1001，还用于根据第二消息向第一SN发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示终端接收到该第一消息。
一种可能的实现方式，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一SN为通信装置100为终端确定的候选SN中的至少一个，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的变更条件和无线资源配置的情况下，第一SN为通信装置100或源SN为终端确定的候选SN以及该源SN中的至少一个，源SN为当前与终端建立连接的SN。
当通信装置100用于实现MN的功能时，关于通信装置100所能实现的其他功能，可参考图5所示的方法实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
比如，以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下，图11示出了一种通信装置110的结构示意图。通信装置110包括收发模块1101。
示例性地，通信装置110可以用于实现终端的功能。通信装置110例如为图5所示的实施例所述的终端。
示例性地，通信装置110可以是终端，也可以是应用于终端中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端功能的组合器件、或部件等。当通信装置110是终端时，收发模块1101可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等。当通信装置110是具有上述终端功能的部件时，收发模块1101可以是射频单元。当通信装置110是芯片系统时，收发模块1101可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口。应理解，本申请实施例中的收发模块1101可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，收发模块1101可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤501，步骤502，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，收发模块1101，用于接收来自MN的第一消息，第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置。
收发模块1101，还用于向MN发送第二消息，该第二消息用于向MN指示通信装置110接收到第一消息。
当通信装置110用于实现终端的功能时，关于通信装置110所能实现的其他功能，可参考图5所示的方法实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
比如，以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下，图12示出了一种通信装置120的结构示意图。示例性地，通信装置120用于实现第一SN的功能。通信装置120例如为图5所示的实施例所述的第一SN。
通信装置120包括收发模块1201和处理模块1202。示例性地，通信装置120可 以是第一SN，也可以是应用于第一SN中的芯片或者其他具有上述第一SN功能的组合器件、或部件等。当通信装置120是第一SN时，收发模块1201可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块1202可以是处理器(或者，处理电路)，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当通信装置120是具有上述第一SN功能的部件时，收发模块1201可以是射频单元，处理模块1202可以是处理器(或者，处理电路)，例如基带处理器。当通信装置120是芯片系统时，收发模块1201可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口，处理模块1202可以是芯片系统的处理器(或者，处理电路)，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解，本申请实施例中的收发模块1201可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现，处理模块1202可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件(或者，称为处理电路)实现。
例如，收发模块1201可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第一SN所执行的全部收发操作，例如步骤503，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理模块1202可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如根据第三消息确定终端接收到第一消息，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
其中，收发模块1201，接收来自MN的第三消息，第三消息用于指示终端接收到第一消息，该第一消息用于指示PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加/变更条件和无线资源配置，该第三消息为该MN根据该终端发送的第二消息确定的，该第二消息用于向该MN指示该终端接收到该第一消息。
处理模块1202，用于根据该第三消息确定该终端接收到该第一消息。
一种可能的实现方式，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的添加条件和无线资源配置的情况下，通信装置120为MN为终端确定的候选SN中的至少一个，在第一消息用于指示候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的变更条件和无线资源配置的情况下，通信装置120为MN或源SN为该终端确定的候选SN以及源SN中的至少一个，源SN为当前与该终端建立连接的SN。
当通信装置120用于实现第一SN的功能时，关于通信装置120所能实现的其他功能，可参考图5所示的方法实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
图13示出了的一种通信系统的组成示意图，如图13所示，该通信系统130中可以包括：MN 1301、候选SN 1302、源SN 1303和终端1304。需要说明的是，图13仅为示例性附图，本申请实施例不限定图13所示通信系统130包括的网元以及网元的个数。
其中，MN 1301具有上述图6所示通信装置60的功能，可以用于向候选SN 1302发送第一消息，接收来自候选SN 1302的第二消息，向终端1304发送第三消息。
候选SN 1302具有上述图7所示通信装置70的功能，可以用于接收来自MN 1301的第一消息，根据第一消息向MN 1301发送第二消息。
源SN 1303具有上述图8所示通信装置80的功能，可以用于确定第四消息，向MN 1301发送第四消息。
终端1304具有上述图9所示通信装置90的功能，可以用于接收来自MN 1301的第三消息，根据第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到该通信系统130对应网元的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
图14示出了的一种通信系统的组成示意图，如图14所示，该通信系统140中可以包括：MN 1401、第一SN 1402和终端1403。需要说明的是，图14仅为示例性附图，本申请实施例不限定图14所示通信系统140包括的网元以及网元的个数。
其中，MN 1401具有上述图10所示通信装置100的功能，可以用于向终端1403发送第一消息，接收来自终端1403的第二消息，根据第二消息向第一SN 1402发送第三消息。
第一SN 1402具有上述图11所示通信装置110的功能，可以用于接收来自MN1401的第一消息，向MN 1401发送第二消息。
终端1403具有上述图12所示通信装置120的功能，可以接收来自MN 1401的第三消息，根据该第三消息确定终端1403接收到第一消息。
需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到该通信系统140对应网元的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机，芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任 何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (36)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    主基站向候选辅基站发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，所述第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为所述第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；
    所述主基站接收来自所述候选辅基站的第二消息，所述第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表；
    所述主基站向所述终端发送第三消息，所述第三消息包括所述第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述主基站接收来自源辅基站的第四消息，所述第四消息包括所述第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述源辅基站为所述终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述源辅基站触发的。
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述主基站为所述终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，所述第一标识为所述主基站确定的。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三消息还包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述主基站触发的。
  7. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    候选辅基站接收来自主基站的第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，所述第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为所述第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；
    所述候选辅基站根据所述第一消息向所述主基站发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述候选辅基站接收来所述自主基站的第六消息，所述第六消息用于指示所述终端接收到第三消息，所述第三消息为所述主基站发送给所述终端的消息，所述第三消 息包括所述第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
  10. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    源辅基站确定第四消息，所述第四消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述源辅基站为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，所述第一标识用于指示当前与所述终端连接的PSCell变更为所述第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；
    所述源辅基站向主基站发送所述第四消息。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识包括测量标识，和/或，条件重配置标识。
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，所述第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述源辅基站触发的。
  13. 根据权利要求10-12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述源辅基站接收来自所述主基站的第六消息，所述第六消息用于指示所述终端接收到第三消息，所述第三消息为所述主基站发送给所述终端的消息，所述第三消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表。
  14. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    主基站向候选辅基站发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；
    所述主基站接收来自所述候选辅基站的第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一信息，所述第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表；
    所述主基站向终端发送第三消息，所述第三消息包括所述第一信息。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述主基站接收来自源辅基站的第四消息，所述第四消息包括所述第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述源辅基站为所述终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一消息还包括所述第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，所述第四消息还包括所述第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述源辅基站触发的。
  18. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述主基站为所述终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，所述测量标识为所述主基站确定的。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三消息还包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述主基站触发的。
  20. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    候选辅基站接收来自主基站的第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；
    所述候选辅基站根据所述第一消息向所述主基站发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一信息，所述第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一消息还包括所述第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述候选辅基站接收来所述自主基站的第六消息，所述第六消息用于指示终端接收到第三消息，所述第三消息为所述主基站发送给所述终端的消息，所述第三消息包括所述第一信息。
  23. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    源辅基站确定第四消息，所述第四消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述源辅基站为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell；
    所述源辅基站向主基站发送所述第四消息。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四消息还包括所述第一候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四消息还包括第一指示信息，其中，所述第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述源辅基站触发的。
  26. 根据权利要求23-25中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述源辅基站接收来自所述主基站的第六消息，所述第六消息用于指示所述终端接收到第三消息，所述第三消息为所述主基站发送给所述终端的消息，所述第三消息包括第一信息，所述第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表。
  27. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于向候选辅基站发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，所述第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为所述第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；
    所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述候选辅基站的第二消息，所述第二消息包括 第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表；
    所述收发模块，还用于向所述终端发送第三消息，所述第三消息包括所述第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息。
  28. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，所述第一标识用于指示当前与终端连接的PSCell变更为所述第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；
    所述收发模块，还用于根据所述第一消息向所述主基站发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表。
  29. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；
    所述处理模块，用于确定第四消息，所述第四消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述通信装置为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell，所述第一标识用于指示当前与所述终端连接的PSCell变更为所述第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件；
    所述收发模块，用于向主基站发送所述第四消息。
  30. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：收发模块和处理模块；
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第三消息，所述第三消息包括第二候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的第一标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，所述第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括源辅基站或所述主基站为所述通信装置配置的至少一个候选PSCell，所述第一标识用于指示当前与所述通信装置连接的PSCell为所述第一标识对应的候选PSCell的条件，所述源辅基站为当前与所述通信装置建立连接的辅基站，所述第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述源辅基站触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述主基站触发的；
    所述处理模块，用于根据所述第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
  31. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于向候选辅基站发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自所述候选辅基站的第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一信息，所述第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表；
    所述收发模块，用于向终端发送第三消息，所述第三消息包括所述第一信息。
  32. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识；
    所述收发模块，还用于根据所述第一消息向所述主基站发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一信息，所述第一信息包括第二候选PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述第二候选PSCell列表。
  33. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；
    所述处理模块，用于确定第四消息，所述第四消息包括第一候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，以及每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括所述通信装置为终端配置的至少一个候选PSCell；
    所述收发模块，用于向主基站发送所述第四消息。
  34. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：收发模块和处理模块；
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自主基站的第三消息，所述第三消息包括第一信息，所述第一信息包括第二候选主辅小区PSCell列表中每个候选PSCell的标识，每个候选PSCell对应的测量标识，每个候选PSCell对应的条件重配置标识，每个候选PSCell对应的无线资源配置信息以及第一指示信息，其中，所述第二候选PSCell列表包括的候选PSCell都包括在第一候选PSCell列表中，所述第一候选PSCell列表包括源辅基站或所述主基站为所述通信装置配置的至少一个候选PSCell，所述源辅基站为当前与所述通信装置建立连接的辅基站，所述第一指示信息用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述源辅基站触发的，或者用于指示条件PSCell变更是由所述主基站触发的；
    所述处理模块，用于根据所述第三消息进行条件PSCell变更。
  35. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述装置执行如权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求7至9中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求10至13中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求14至19中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求20至22中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求23至26中任一项所述的方法。
  36. 一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，其特征在于，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求7至9中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求10至13中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求14至19中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求20至22中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求23至26中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/123017 2020-10-22 2020-10-22 通信方法及装置 WO2022082685A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP20958267.5A EP4216605A4 (en) 2020-10-22 2020-10-22 COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DEVICE
CN202080102977.8A CN115868203A (zh) 2020-10-22 2020-10-22 通信方法及装置
PCT/CN2020/123017 WO2022082685A1 (zh) 2020-10-22 2020-10-22 通信方法及装置
US18/303,422 US20230262539A1 (en) 2020-10-22 2023-04-19 Communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/123017 WO2022082685A1 (zh) 2020-10-22 2020-10-22 通信方法及装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/303,422 Continuation US20230262539A1 (en) 2020-10-22 2023-04-19 Communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022082685A1 true WO2022082685A1 (zh) 2022-04-28

Family

ID=81291402

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/123017 WO2022082685A1 (zh) 2020-10-22 2020-10-22 通信方法及装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230262539A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4216605A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN115868203A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022082685A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023216959A1 (zh) * 2022-05-07 2023-11-16 维沃移动通信有限公司 条件重配置信息的处理方法、装置及通信设备

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014000610A1 (zh) * 2012-06-28 2014-01-03 华为技术有限公司 辅助主小区的调整方法以及基站
CN110545567A (zh) * 2019-09-29 2019-12-06 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 小区条件更新方法及用户设备、计算机可读存储介质
CN111314974A (zh) * 2020-02-11 2020-06-19 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 主辅小区更新的处理方法、装置、基站及存储介质

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014000610A1 (zh) * 2012-06-28 2014-01-03 华为技术有限公司 辅助主小区的调整方法以及基站
CN110545567A (zh) * 2019-09-29 2019-12-06 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 小区条件更新方法及用户设备、计算机可读存储介质
CN111314974A (zh) * 2020-02-11 2020-06-19 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 主辅小区更新的处理方法、装置、基站及存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "Conditional PSCell addition/change", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2007749, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. E-meeting; 20200817 - 20200828, 7 August 2020 (2020-08-07), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051912376 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023216959A1 (zh) * 2022-05-07 2023-11-16 维沃移动通信有限公司 条件重配置信息的处理方法、装置及通信设备

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4216605A4 (en) 2023-11-15
EP4216605A1 (en) 2023-07-26
CN115868203A (zh) 2023-03-28
US20230262539A1 (en) 2023-08-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021179911A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2021203443A1 (zh) 一种定位信息上报的方法及通信装置
CN108811020A (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
TW201545577A (zh) 使用跨系統交遞測量識別覆蓋空洞
JP7241865B2 (ja) 情報処理方法、通信デバイス、システム、および記憶媒体
WO2020052481A1 (zh) 一种能力信息接收、发送方法及装置
WO2022077387A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置
WO2019098934A1 (en) Cell global identifier reporting in a wireless communication system
CN112583563A (zh) 一种参考信号配置的确定方法及装置
US20230259391A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022082356A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
BR112020020070A2 (pt) Método, aparelho e sistema de comunicações, e meio de armazenamento
US20230262539A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN111526577A (zh) 一种时钟同步方法及设备
CN111586795B (zh) 一种通信方法和接入网设备
CN116746209A (zh) 一种上行定位方法及通信装置
CN114125958A (zh) 下行定位测量方法、装置及系统
EP4207656A1 (en) Downlink positioning method and communication apparatus
CN113518476A (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2022242548A1 (zh) 用于定位的通信方法以及通信装置
JP7394198B1 (ja) 配信サーバ、配信サーバの制御方法、及び配信サーバの制御プログラム
CN111819884A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
JP7436679B2 (ja) 測位方法、装置、およびシステム
WO2023179231A1 (zh) 小区信息的配置方法、装置、可读存储介质及芯片系统
WO2023179262A1 (zh) 小区信息的配置方法、装置、可读存储介质及芯片系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20958267

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020958267

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230421

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE